JP6734312B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to set a set value relating to a probability of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, for example, there is one described in Patent Document 1. Patent Document 1 describes that the setting change process is executed when the power switch is operated to the ON side while the front frame is opened and the setting key switch is operated to the ON side. It is also described that the RAM area other than the setting value storage means is cleared in the setting change processing.

JP, 2010-200902, A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the gaming machine configured to be able to set a setting value relating to the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player may not always be able to perform appropriate processing. There is.

An object of the present invention is to enable suitable processing in a gaming machine configured to be able to set a set value relating to a probability of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Settings for the probability of being controlled to an advantageous beneficial state for the player (e.g., a set value "1" to set value "3") a a configurable gaming machine,
Operation means (for example, clear switch) provided so as to be able to execute initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing, RAM clear 2 processing) based on being operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operating means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When performing a plurality of processes including a set value changing process for changing the set value , it is determined that the specific information is stored without determining that the operating means is operated for each process. And a process executing means for executing a process based on the above (for example, a part of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing steps 150IWS025, S034, S048).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the processing in the gaming machine configured to be able to set the set value relating to the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player. Particularly, in a process that requires a certain amount of processing time, such as changing a set value, specific information (in this example, a RAM clear flag) is stored, and the RAM clear flag is checked to execute the process, which is preferable. It can be performed.
Further, an information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value is set,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, and a production execution means capable of executing suggestive production,
When the set value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the effect execution unit can execute the suggestion effect with a ratio corresponding to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous to the player among the plurality of set values. May be set.
(1) Further, another aspect of the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
A title notification means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestive effect,
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).
With such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the suggestive effect,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common mode (for example, FIG. 9C).
With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to which suggestive effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, development effect or notice effect) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even after the notification of the title.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The suggestive effect execution means executes at least a first suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (for example, reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestive effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, since the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
The rate of control to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestive effect is executed than when the second suggestive effect is executed.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to the title notified in the predetermined period.
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
A detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player,
And a specific display execution unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that performs a specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection unit,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) are displayed. Is possible,
In the ineffective period of the detection by the detecting means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 17E, FIG. 18I),
During the effective period of the detection by the detection means, the action effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18(J) and 18(K)).
With such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
As a suggestion display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display by the shutter image 31AK061 of the first size to be displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A) Etc.) and a second suggestion display in which the display size is the second size (e.g., reach title image 31AK062 of the second size displayed at the time of reaching the reach title shown in (d) of FIG. 19)). The display device 5 and the CPU 120) for effect control are further provided,
The display means is
A plurality of types of elements having different modes (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in FIGS. 19(a) and (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) configured to include
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. The shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D may include the elements E1 to E5.
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the specific image regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately notify that the specific image is displayed.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure for explaining a variation pattern and a kind of reach. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production decision processing. It is a figure showing a decision rate in notice production decision processing. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non-reach lost variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 150IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 150IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 150IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed when a power supply is turned on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial result determination table. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start waiting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a pre-game suggestive effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the game suggestion production decision processing. It is the explanation drawing which shows the suggestion production decision table during the game. It is a flowchart showing an example of a puzzle effect setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of a puzzle effect setting process. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a puzzle effect determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a puzzle effect mode determination table. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production decision processing during the big hit. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit medium suggestion effect determination table, a character effect effect determination table, and a light guide plate effect determination table. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect mode of a puzzle effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect mode of a puzzle effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect mode of a puzzle effect. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for gaming machines in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The change includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variation.

The special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers, etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). The special figure game and the variable display of the decorative design which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are suspended is also referred to as the suspended storage number. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A is the number of LEDs that are turned on. The first reserved memory number is displayed by, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port which is always kept in a fixed open state through which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls are paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, and thus the tip of the movable wing piece. Is close to the prize winning ball device 6A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting prize hole (the second starting prize hole is also closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a special winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game ball enters the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, the winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays the normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of ordinary figure games that are pending to be executed, by the number of LEDs that are lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so that it can be supplied to a ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and can be tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B which allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol loss symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol defect". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state to be described later (starting winning occurs, In the case where the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" symbol and a big hit symbol. When a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" will occur.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of a lapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and a timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

The type of big hit is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, by shortening the average figure change time (the period during which figure changes) compared to the normal state, and improving the probability of "per figure" in the figure game from the normal state, The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which it is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to improving the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The condition that the ending condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting etc.).

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a time saving state, a probability change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is a "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that “small hit” may not be provided as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and/or excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the image display device 5, as the effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the first special figure game. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative pattern which is not stopped and displayed when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination described later. Is an aspect in which is continuing.

Further, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" and the like) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" which is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-determination variation pattern (normal pattern). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probabilistic variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is "small hit", the fixed decorative pattern (for example, "" which is a predetermined small hit combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of a part of big hit type (big hit type of big hit game state similar to small hit game state) and when "small hit" A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be displayed as a stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the variable display is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit medium effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting medium production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state high accuracy state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed in the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or a game ball passes) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), a game status (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening of big winning opening, winning of prize, number of reserved memories, game status), command for designating error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The production control CPU 120 displays the execution of production based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on/off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal, a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for receiving the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that power recovery has been performed or that power recovery is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After completing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, whereby the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the execution and suspension management of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold indicator 25C is turned on to display the number of held ordinary figure symbols.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of holding memories is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the starting winning prize thus set to be transmitted is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the special symbol process process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting a production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and the big hit type when "big hit" Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". Includes processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether there is reach, etc.), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process for setting for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts varying It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). It includes a process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on the fact that the display result is "big hit". Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and the upper limit number of times of round execution are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The big hit opening process is ended.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". After the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing is ended.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the big hit ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing for ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small hitting open process ends.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation for informing the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in, for example, an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the production operation using various production devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed in accordance with the production control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes prefetching advance notice setting processing (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative design in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what is done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect display processing during variable display ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving the command designating to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command for ending the small winning game state from the main board 11, for example. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit mid-game production process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "6". In this big hit mid production processing, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the production contents in the big hit gaming state, and executes various production controls in the big hit gaming state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and types of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8(A), in the present embodiment, the variable patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 are non-reach-miss patterns in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is “miss”. , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "miss". The reach change pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., the display result is "big hit". Variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is, as shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, normal reach<super reach E<super reach D<super reach C<super reach B. <Higher in order of Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it is a big hit.

In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. Further, during the reach effect of the super reach, there is a case where the development effect of developing (promoting) to reach with higher reliability is executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like illustrated in FIG. 8A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to one level higher super reach, but a variation pattern in which the reliability develops in two or more stages is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach, which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8B, the title notification mode differs depending on the reach type. Specifically, the super-reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super-reach, notifies the title of the reach only by display, and the other super-reach notifies the title by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with higher reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively agitated, and the effect of production is improved. The title notification mode may be changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title character (Gothic font, Mincho font, etc.) and typeface (line book, open book, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. .. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 9(B), the decorative pattern showing the numeral 7 on “left” and “right” is stopped to be in the reach mode. After that, the effect branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach production is started, such as when the introduction part of the reach production of super reach (also referred to as super reach production) is finished, as shown in FIG. 9D, the entire screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. The title 31AK002 (here, “SP reach A” here) of the super reach A is displayed on the screen, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (“super reach A” here) is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is notified. After that, the title 31AK002 of the super reach A is erased, the character 31AK003 as the enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are confronted with each other, as shown in FIG. 9(E). The succeeding part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and when the teammate character wins in the battle production, it becomes a big hit, and when the teammate character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

Note that when the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the speaker 8 may output a voice corresponding to the dialogue. The dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed in subtitles on the lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the super reach effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 9(F), the title 31AK005 (here "SP reach B" is displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of super reach B. It After that, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is erased, the character 31AK006 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are confronted with each other, as shown in FIG. 9G. The succeeding part of the reach effect of super reach B is executed.

As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the player has shown the introduction part of the super reach effect, etc., so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

Further, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9(C)→(D)→(E)...) and Super Reach B(FIG. 9(C)→(F)→(G)...), the titles are In the introduction part until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9(C)). By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to which super-reach will be performed after the super-reach effect is started and which title will be notified. Super-reach A and super-reach B are not limited to a completely common presentation mode until the title is announced, and at least one of them can be determined by paying attention to the production. You may make it a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, the effect of displaying the enemy character or suggesting the enemy character) is executed in a mode related to the subsequently notified title. You may By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved and the player comes to pay attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super-reach will be performed.

(Super reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 9H, a title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the characters “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, "defeat the enemy") is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 that indicates the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation of a big hit, but it does not have to completely match the degree of reliability of the big hit of reach.

It should be noted that the notification of the sound of the super reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is changed depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 9(I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach production. Note that FIG. 9(I) shows the same effect contents as in FIG. 9(C) (super reach A, super reach B), but a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9(J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is executed. It

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 10(A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the characters “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is announced. Note that in Super Reach E, the title is not announced by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other. To be executed. As described above, in the super reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach effect. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach effect of the super reach E with low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive expectation by notifying the title without stopping the progress of the reach effect. On the other hand, in the reach effects of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9D, 9F, and 9F). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, in the super reach productions such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Contrary to this embodiment, in the super-reach reach effect with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be performed without stopping the reach effect. In the reach effect of super-reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B with high jackpot reliability, the title is announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach with low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of reach with high jackpot reliability, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low jackpot reliability, super The title may be announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. The title is announced in a part (second area) of the screen. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is used as a background for the title notification and the title is displayed there. It may be one (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability. Further, in the case of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect, the display area may be different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be different.

(Expectation level indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in super-reach A and super-reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, super-reach D, which has a lower jackpot reliability than super-reach A and super-reach B, is displayed without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification in, the expectation level suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation level indication is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his/her expectation by displaying an expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

As shown in FIG. 9(H) and the like, the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be indicated by a meter or gauge, or may correspond to the expectation degree. The displayed numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9(H) and the like, when the number of black stars is used, half the number (half) of black stars may be displayed, and the number of expected levels may be increased.

(Timing display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach effect can be focused. In Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the below-described determination effect is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during super reach production. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title display end timing may be changed at any timing, because the effect of production can be improved.

Here, although the effect operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, for example, title notification or expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each reach effect is executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display), the decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is the “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “miss”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10(B), a decided effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 10C, an image 31AK013 showing that the teammate character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. The fixed decorative pattern is derived. If the display result is “miss”, an image showing that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach lose combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the decided effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to focus attention on the decided effect, and it is possible to execute the title notification with a sharpness.

In the example of the production operation shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach production of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced and the variable display is executed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, but during the reach production. The method of displaying the decorative pattern may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

In addition, when displaying a hold display, an active display, a character that is permanently displayed during variable display, and a display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, during the reach effect of super reach, it is appropriately hidden in order to draw attention to the reach effect. May be At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during the reach production with low reliability such as the super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting too much due to the low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of a production operation when the development production is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown, the reach effect is interrupted and an effect that the screen is torn is executed. After that, when developing to the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of the super reach A is announced and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. In the case of development into super reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of super reach B is announced and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the notification of the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the notification of the title of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is the reach for notifying the title by the display and the sound, the title notification by the display and the sound is executed again.

The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11(B), and may be an effect in which the screen gradually cracks and cracks, or a sandstorm (display indicating that there is a failure) is displayed. You may do it. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a developmental development effect such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 9(H), the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 displays the black stars indicating the expectations from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, and step by step. You may make it perform an expectation suggestion production which suggests an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12A, when announcing the title of Super Reach D, five white star expectation degree indications 31AK021 are first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12(B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12(C), the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK021. A performance that fits into one of the white stars of is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the reach expectation. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 12F, the black star is highlighted such that it glows. By doing this, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

In the example shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, the black stars are displayed one by one, and the degree of expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step, but there are two or more black stars. It may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more steps. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed to raise the expectation by half. In this case, different voices may be output, or the same voice may be output, depending on the number of stars displayed (the number of stages of expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the expectation suggestive production is diversified, and the production effect is improved. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, and it fits in the white star of the degree of expectation indication, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases You may make it perform the effect like.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command that specifies a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the voice output from the speaker 8, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changed by the player's operation.

FIG. 12G to FIG. 12L are example operation effects of title notification and expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes and the special mode is set. In the normal mode, title notification and expectation suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect mode from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, a sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a sound different from the normal mode (for example, a sound having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12(H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12(I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024. A production that fits in one of the white rhombuses is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound “Pong” indicating that the black diamonds indicating the degree of expectation have increased. As shown in FIGS. 12(J) and 12(K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the reach expectation. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted such that it glows, as shown in FIG. In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) that is determined according to the player's selection, the game status, etc., by varying the title notification mode, the effect is diversified and the effect effect is increased. improves.

Although FIG. 12 shows an example of the effect operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, other reach effects (title notification, expectation suggestion effect effect) depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed). (Including) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not to notify the reach title and the execution rate of the title notification may be changed. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, the effect according to the player's preference can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is executed. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which reduces the number of the display which suggests stepwise. Such an expectation suggesting effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggesting effect of the present embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect in which the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display is increased stepwise, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the characters of "SP reach C") is displayed, thereby The Reach C title is announced. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the notification of the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the notification of the title of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, the expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is 3 is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestion display change may be executed.

(Advance notice)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed in accordance with the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach A. After that, as shown in FIG. 14(B), a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. In this way, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is executed. In the title notice shown in FIG. 14, the title display mode (display color) may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing of displaying the title in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

In addition, when the title announcement in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed is executed, the sound according to the changed display mode may be output after the display mode of the title is changed. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title in the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the notice effect or the development effect in which the degree of expectation that is controlled to the jackpot advantageous state is improved. By doing so, when the title is once notified, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and an effect mode. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. In the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

If it is a variation pattern of super-reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of super-reach (whether or not to execute the title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “miss”. As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the title of Super Reach changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and “black” to “fruit pattern”. The ones that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability varies depending on the timing of change in the title display color. By doing so, the player pays attention to the timing of changing the display color of the title, and the effect of production is improved.

Note that the "fruit pattern" may be such that the title characters are displayed in bold and the characters themselves are "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area is "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display colors that change, as shown in FIG. 14, the display colors may change after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings when the display color changes. The jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super-reach (for example, super-reach D or super-reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the changing timing may be determined. Then, in the case of super-reach with a short title display period (for example, super-reach A or super-reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than that of super-reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as effect modes, the display color of the title is determined in the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16(A) in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. 16(B) in the special mode. Determine the title display color in different proportions. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode (display color or change timing of display color) of the title notice depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a dialogue notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the display mode of the dialogue of the character in the reach production of the super reach (for example, the display color of the dialogue).

After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the character dialogue (whether or not to execute the dialogue notice) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16C, for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “miss”. As shown in FIG. 16(C), the display color of the lines in the reach effect is changed from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”, and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue and the effect is improved. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the dialogue is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings when the display color changes. The jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the effect modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, if the same notice mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the line notice, and the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same notice mode is obtained. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timings of the presentation mode of the title announcement and the dialogue announcement. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

It should be noted that instead of the speech advance notice, the advance notice effect may be executed to give an advance notice of the jackpot reliability by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability varies depending on the change timing.

After determining the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect or when it is determined that the variation pattern is not the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence/absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the title notice and the line notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but the title notice can be executed in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the super-reach with low reliability). Alternatively, at least one of the speech notice and the notice may be made executable. Although the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination rate shown in FIG. 16, the determination rate is arbitrary, and the determination rate may be different depending on the type of super reach, for example. By doing so, the notice effect corresponding to the type of reach can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable presentation modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the effects are varied and the effect of the effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute the notice production with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect form of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect form changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect in which the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image or the like) of the effect effect may be common regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence/absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed by the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes according to the effect mode of the action effect (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may differ, or the title effect may change. The ratio of which presentation mode changes (the ratio of the effect) may be different from that of the serif notice, or the ratio of how many colors (how many stages) to change may be different. .. By executing such action effect, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the dialogue acts when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence/absence of execution of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates according to the effect modes. By doing so, the effect effect according to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either a title or a dialogue is displayed according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the effect contents of the reach effect.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above characteristic section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided in the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although referred to as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. On the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be performed on the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed after the title notification, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title or the degree of expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the image display device 5 notifies the title. By doing so, the title and the expectation suggestion display can be displayed without hindering the super reach effect in the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestive effect has been described. May be. For example, in the case of executing a look-ahead zone effect in which a background image and an effect mode on the image display device 5 are changed to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), the transition zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification. In the case of presenting a mission (“Let's reach with 7”, “Use a stick controller to destroy all enemies”, etc.) and execute a mission effect that gives the player an advantageous state when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to notification of mission titles.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, at the timing of deriving the display result, the decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is the “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is displayed ( 10(B) to (D)). Instead of such a decided effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving a display result, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased and the interest is improved.

FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 are diagrams showing a production operation example of super reach in a modified example in which an operation production is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17(A), after the reach mode is set on the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(B), a character 31AK041 which is a friend character and a character 31AK042 which is an enemy character are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17(C) to (F) and FIGS. 18(G) to (I), the reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modified example, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. The jackpot reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, the image showing that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode with higher reliability.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17(D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17(E), the praying character 31AK045 is changed to a pleased character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is changed to the large button image 31AK047. Changes to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 18(H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18(I), the effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is shot from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047 is hit by the bullet. The effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without the effect effect. In addition, the operation effect image may not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

After that, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 18(J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the central portion as shown in FIG. 18(K). , A display prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is in an effective operation valid period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 18(L). Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18(M), a fixed decorative design that is a big hit combination is derived. If no operation is detected within a predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 18L is automatically displayed.

In this modified example, the operation effect images include a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image, and when the operation effects using these images are executed in the order of small button image<large button image<stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly-reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, improving the effect of the effect and increasing the player's expectation. Can be maintained.

In the example of the effect operation shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted. However, the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. It may be executed. The determination related to the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether the operation effect is present, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which shows the expectation degree of control to an advantageous state, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, the specific image may be displayed in some cases. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed by including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 that form the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach production, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image<blue image<red image<fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach letter in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

When the shutter display and the reach title display are performed, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification of outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 19(b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is set as shown in FIG. 19(c).

Next, as shown in FIG. 19D, the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed, for example, in a small size on the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Furthermore, after the common sound is output, an effect is produced in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "hot and hot" indicating that the jackpot reliability is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the common sound and the specific sound have been described in the case where the output periods are completely separated, the output periods may be partially overlapped.

Then, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19(e) is executed. The enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "Battle Victory!" is displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is reported that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production is completed, the display returns to the variable display screen based on the original numerical design. As shown in FIG. 19(f), all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 that form the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 which have different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately inform that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence or absence of the shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In that case, the shutter effect may be determined based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when it is determined that the title display color is a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily executed. Further, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 15 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 150IW)
Next, the characteristic unit 150IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-1 and 20-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 150IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board constituting a gaming board surface. (Gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 150IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, a glass door frame 150IW003a having a glass window is provided on the gaming machine frame 150IW003 between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 150IW003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface. The glass door frame 150IW003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 150IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. The door frame 150IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in a board case 150IW201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. Further, the main board 11 is provided with a setting key 150IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later.

The setting switching main body portion provided with an operation unit such as these setting keys 150IW051 that can be operated by the player is housed in the substrate case 150IW201 together with the main substrate 11, and the setting key 150IW051 does not open the substrate case 150IW201. The substrate case 150IW201 is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back side so that it can be operated.

Since the board case 150IW201 having the setting key 150IW051 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is impossible to operate from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using the door key. Further, the setting key 150IW051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, so that only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. The setting key 150IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation described later. In the characteristic part 150IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used in combination.

Further, a display monitor 150IW029 and a display changeover switch 150IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 150IW029 are arranged on the board case 150IW201. The display monitor 150IW029 and the display changeover switch 150IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 150IW201. That is, the display monitor 150IW029 and the display changeover switch 150IW030 are arranged on the front surface of the board case 150IW201 when the main board 11 is viewed. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is not opened. Therefore, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 150IW003 opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 150IW051 in the characteristic part 150IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is The setting key 150IW051 may be operated from the inside of the gaming island to be installed. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 150IW, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 and 20-3, the right side portion of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 is provided at the right end portion of the outer frame 150IW001a when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. A security cover 150IW500A that covers the front side of the is attached. The security cover 150IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 150IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 150IW500Ab extending from the rear end portion of the short piece 150IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , And is made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material. The vertical dimension of the short piece 150IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 150IW201. The security cover 150IW500A is fixed to the right end portion of the outer frame 150IW001a via the front end portion of the short piece 150IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 20-2, the long piece 150IW500Ab contacts (or approaches) the right side of the board case 150IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. By doing so, the right side of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 150IW051 becomes inoperable by the long piece 150IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the setting key 150IW051 moves together with the gaming machine frame 150IW003 and moves away from the long piece 150IW500Ab. When the covering state of 150IW500Ab is released, the state becomes operable.

In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 150IW is maintained in a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted by the security cover 150IW500A when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. On the other hand, in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 150IW500A described above is released, and the operation of the setting key 150IW051 is permitted.

Since the board case 150IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 150IW051 when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. It is impossible to change the set value by operating the setting key 150IW051 unless the game machine frame 150IW003 is opened by the door key or the like.

However, in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the gaming hall, even if the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. An illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate is inserted between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the setting keys 150IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as changing the setting value is performed by operating the, the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted by the security cover 150IW500A in the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. By maintaining the restricted state as described above, it is possible to suitably suppress the above fraudulent acts.

Further, even when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 is covered by the security cover 150IW500A, it is accommodated in the substrate case 150IW201 through the transparent security cover 150IW500A. Since it is possible to see through the main board 11 and the like on which it is mounted, it is possible to easily confirm the mounting surface on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted on the main board 11 and the situation such as a seal.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

In the characteristic part 150IW, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the general figure display result determining Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-4 and 20-5, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A fluctuation pattern table for storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 20-4(A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 20-4(B), and FIG. -4 (C), the display result determination table (setting value 3), the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), a big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), a small hit variation pattern determination table ( (Not shown), a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6, a public figure display result determination table (not shown), a public figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 150IW is configured to change the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the jackpot (ball-out rate) is changed. .. The set value is made up of three stages of 1 to 3, and 1 is the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the higher the payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3, the advantage gradually increases. In the feature section 150IW, the winning probability for a small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
20-4(A) to (C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, with respect to each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 20-4(A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is a variable display target. If the set value is “2” or “3”, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 in the non-probable variation, 1/32 in the probable variation). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is supposed to do. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hit, so that the first special symbol is small with a higher probability (1/2) than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display. It is supposed to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-4(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1". You win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/300 when uncertain change, 1/30 when uncertain change) than in some cases. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hit, and the small hit is won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is supposed to do. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability (1/300 when non-probable change, 1/30 when probable change) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability that the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value The winning probability is small, with the same probability (1/2) as when "1" or "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-4(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 in the non-probable variation, 1/28 in the probable variation) than in the case of "2". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is supposed to do. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is the target of variable display, with the same probability (1/280 when non-probable variation, 1/28 when probable variation) To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability that the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value The small win is achieved with the same probability (1/2) as when "1" or "2".

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 20-4(A) to (C). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when the MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 20-4(A) to (C), it is determined that a small hit is made for the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 20-4(A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit game state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make a symbol a small hit symbol.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, the case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, similarly to the winning probability of the big hit, the winning probability of the small hit may be increased as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “1” is set to 1/100, the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “2” is designed to be 1/93.75, You may set so that the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “3” may be 1/87.5.

Further, in a gaming machine in which no small hit is provided, the configuration shown by the feature section 150IW may be applied.

Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-4(A) to (C). The big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the judgment of the big hit is in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variation special figure designation buffer. The common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using different tables for the case where the variation special map designation buffer is the first and the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the second.

Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the case where the degree of advantage increases in the order of the set value “1”<the set value “2”<the set value “3” is shown, for example, the order of the degree of advantage according to the gaming state. May be changed. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine configured to be controlled to a high probability/high base state, maintain the high probability/high base state until the next big hit occurs, and to obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and a period in which a prize ball is likely to be obtained Therefore, in a specific game state (high probability/high base state in this example), unlike other game states, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability/high base state is easy to continue). The value “1” may be set to have the highest advantage.

Further, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the fact that the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end number) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation is applied. If it is the number of terminations, the probability change continuation rate (rate of continuous vacation) may be increased in the order of set value “1”<set value “2”<set value “3”.

In addition, in the characteristic part 150IW, a total of three set values of 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 20-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In addition, in this characteristic part 150IW, when the big hit type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the proportion of which jackpot type is determined is different.

The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination, the jackpot type among jackpot type A to jackpot type C. It is a table that is referred to when deciding on either.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5(A), a determination value corresponding to a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination is assigned for each set value, but for simplification of description, assignment is made. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-7, which will be described later, are actually assigned with determination values corresponding to random numbers. For simplification, the percentage of the assigned decision value is shown.

As shown in FIG. 20-5(A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the setting value is “1”, the percentage determined as the jackpot type C is high, and when the setting value is “2”, The determination value is assigned such that when the percentage determined as the jackpot type B is high and the setting value is “3”, the percentage determined as the jackpot type A is high.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 150IW will be described with reference to FIG. 20-5(B). In the feature portion 150IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period in which the big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the big hit game state is started after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period during which the fanfare production as the production operation to be notified is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period in which the jackpot opening post-processing in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round in which the big winning opening is opened on the effect control board 12 side is finished, Is a period during which an interval effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period in which the big hit end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period of time.

As shown in FIG. 20-5(B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the big hit type A, the longest in the big hit type B, and the longest in the big hit type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the characteristic part 150IW, when the set value is “1”, the percentage of determination as the jackpot type C is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the setting value is “3”, the percentage of determination as the big hit type A is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

The feature section 150IW is configured such that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value "1"<"2"<"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured such that the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period becomes longer in the order of “<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling probability Can be prevented from becoming too high.

The feature section 150IW is configured to be able to execute a big hit medium suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a big hit game, but this big hit medium suggestion effect is performed in a fanfare period, an interval period and an ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fun of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased. Further, by directing the interest of the player to the suggestive effect during the big hit, it is possible to make the duration of each period less noticeable.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, common effects may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is not easily noticed by the players is commonly executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 150IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each big hit type, and the percentage of which big hit type is determined for each set value is different, so that the big hit When the winning probability (ball output rate) is set high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set to be longer, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the determination values are set such that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which a relatively long period is set are selected in the descending order of the big hit type A<B<C. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be made longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In this characteristic part 150IW, in any of the big hit type A to the big hit type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control which are executed after the end of the big hit game state are a certain number of times (100 times in the main feature part 150IW). The figure game ends, or the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time saving control and probability variation control may be different for each big hit type. May be, in the case of a particular big hit type, high-precision control and time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state, continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is a so-called condominium state that occurs continuously without going through the normal state. In the feature part 150IW, the jackpot rate is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each set value. The rate (rate of consecutive holidays) may be different.

Further, in the feature section 150IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the big hit type A to the big hit type C (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, etc.), and the fanfare period and interval. It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period are different, for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probability variation control, and the number of controls are different for each big hit type, and the advantage is different You may do it. In this case, the effects during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

In addition, in the characteristic part 150IW, according to the set value that is set, the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C at different rates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types A, the jackpot types B, and the jackpot types C that cannot be determined or There may be more than one. That is, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in deciding on a percentage.

Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period differ depending on the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period do not depend on the type of jackpot. The period may be different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period according to the set value may be uniformly determined depending on which of the set values is “1” to “3”. Further, for example, depending on which one of the set values “1” to “3”, the lottery process is performed with the selection probability according to the set value, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in the characteristic part 150IW, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different depending on the set value that is set, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. ..

In the feature section 150IW, the big hit type is determined by using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

Further, in the characteristic part 150IW, the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the game nature itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the one, the game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game characteristic of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the probability of a big hit in the normal state is 1/200, and a game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the big hit game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to a probable state based on passing a predetermined count switch, the percentage of game balls passing through the count switch during the big hit game varies depending on the big hit type If the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50. It may be a game property (so-called 1 type/2 types mixed type) in which a game ball is controlled to a big hit game state based on a game ball passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as the game playability, the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3. It is also possible to provide a setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

Furthermore, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (the game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time it is played, and when the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball is It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a positive change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch).

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIG. 20-5(C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. As shown in FIG. 20-5(C), in the present feature part 150IW, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 20-5(C), in the feature part 150IW, the determination ratios of the small hit types A to C are the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “3” is set.

Further, in the present characteristic part 150IW, regardless of which of the small hit types A to C, the opening period and the number of times of opening the special winning opening during the small hit game are the same, and the advantage degree in the game is the same. ..

(Variation pattern determination table)
The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variation display result "big hit" and the variation display result "small hit" The small hitting variation pattern determination table used when is predetermined, and the loss variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variation display result "miss" are prepared in advance. ..

(Loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram of a loss variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic unit 150IW, a period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), and other periods ( In the following, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and different loss variation pattern determination tables are used.

Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6(A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 20-6(B). The variation pattern is determined using the second lost variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic unit 150IW, the period from when the setting is changed at power-on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, the period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as the special period regardless of whether the setting is changed when the power is turned on. In addition, a real time clock or the like may be used to set a special period in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am). Also, the period until the first big hit occurs may be a special period.

20-6(A) and 20(B) show the normal reach loss and the super reach loss in the order of the set values "1"<"2"<"3". The determination value is assigned such that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of the normal reach or the super reach differs depending on the set value, so that the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the normal reach or the super reach is executed.

Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6(A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6(B), and further has a set value. The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the two becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of performing normal reach than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), and thus the motivation for playing the game in the special period. Can be given, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced.

Note that, for example, fluctuation patterns involving super-reach (or specific fluctuation patterns among them) are determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in set values (or the difference between special periods and non-special periods). You may do it. By doing so, the execution ratio differs only in a specific variation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific variation pattern is executed. become. In addition, conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

In addition, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss depending on the set value, except for non-reach loss. The determination values are assigned so that the ratios (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) are different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6(A), the ratio of the normal reach loss becomes significantly higher in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” (this example). 5-6). Specifically, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6(B) shows the normal reach loss in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. Is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

In the characteristic part 150IW, setting suggestive effects can be executed at different rates according to the set value. This is because the execution rates of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different according to the set value. The concept includes that the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different, and the execution ratios of only the normal reach loss are different according to the set value.

In the characteristic part 150IW, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6(A) and (B) is used. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. Further, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 to perform variable display of decorative patterns. Note that the dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

Not limited to the example of the characteristic unit 150IW, for example, a special variation pattern suggesting a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display of the decorative pattern is different from the normal pattern and the set value is 1 or 2) May be selected), so that the special variation pattern can be selected only during the special period. With such a structure as well, it is possible to provide an incentive to play a game during a special period, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Non-reach loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 20-7 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table. In the feature section 150IW, a plurality of types of non-reach-miss variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach-loss, the non-reach-loss variation A to C is further determined. Is configured. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

As shown in FIG. 20-7, in the non-reach-miss-variation pattern determination table, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination of non-reach-miss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high and the set value is "2". If the set value is “3”, the rate determined as non-reach loss B (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Is assigned a judgment value.

In the feature unit 150IW, when the set value is “1”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, and therefore the variation time at non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, and therefore the variation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

The feature section 150IW is configured such that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value "1"<"2"<"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured such that the average variation time becomes longer in the order of “<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling probability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

In the characteristic portion 150IW, the average variation time is configured to be different by varying the ratio of which of the non-reach loses A to C varies in variation time according to the set value. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) so that the variation time is different, and the selection ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when a plurality of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the variation time is different, the time of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern and the high-speed variation display etc. may be made different so that the effects such as effects It is desirable that there be no difference in how they look.

Further, in the characteristic portion 150IW, the average variation time is configured to be different depending on the set value. However, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, according to the set value, the fixed decorative design (final The period in which the stop pattern) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is high, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the fixed decorative design (final stop design) is stopped and displayed, that is, to delay the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 150IW, the variation time is set for each of the non-reach loses A to C, and the proportion of which of the non-reach loses A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the big hit is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration but is set for each set value. The fixed time may be fixed, and the variation time may be longer when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is higher.

The characteristic unit 150IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening that has a shorter variation time than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time of 1.5 seconds) is provided that is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time of 9 seconds). Then, this shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is in a state close to the upper limit, this state is canceled and variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is intended. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the characteristic unit 150IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or larger than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Note that, regardless of the configuration of the characteristic unit 150IW, the fluctuation time for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or larger than the predetermined number may be changed according to the set value.

(Setting confirmation process, setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 150IW will be described. 20-8 to 20-10 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 150IW. In the characteristic unit 150IW, the processes of steps IWS001 and S002 are the same as the processes of steps S1 and S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the production control means for measuring the time until the production control means (specifically, the production control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 150IWS003). In this case, the effect control means start waiting timer is set to a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 150IWS004), and confirms whether the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 150IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 150IWS004 and the processes of steps 150IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the production control means start waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 150IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 150IWS003 to S005, the process after step 150IWS006 is executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and restoration processes are executed. To be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization designation command, and a command at the time of restoration, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch has been pressed when the power to the gaming machine was turned on (step 150IWS006).

In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the power-off process (see step 150IWS031) described later, but the RAM clear flag is cleared once in step 150IWS006 when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and then the clear switch is set. If so, the RAM clear flag is newly set (see steps 150IWS016 and S022), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the RAM clear flag is also cleared when the power-off process is executed, and then the clear switch is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the RAM clear flag is newly set. Good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S4 (step 150IWS007). Specifically, in step 150IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 150IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 150IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the data check of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) by the same process as step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 150IWS008). In step 150IWS008, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 150IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 150IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 150IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values “1” to “3”. (Step 150 IWS009). If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values “1” to “3”, the process proceeds to step 150IWS011.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (N in step 150IWS008) or when the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "3" (Y in step 150IWS009). The CPU 103 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 102 (step 150IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

When the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values “1” to “3” (N in step 150 IWS009), the CPU 103 is executing the setting change process for changing the set value. It is confirmed whether or not the setting change flag indicating that is set is set (step 150IWS011). If the setting change flag is set (step 150IWS011; Yes), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted due to power failure or the like during the change of the set value, the process proceeds to step 150IWS012.

In step 150IWS012, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on (step 150IWS012). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 150IW051 is on (step 150IWS013). If the setting key 150IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 150IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 150IWS015).

In this example, the RAM clear processing includes a RAM clear 1 processing (see step 150IWS051) and a RAM clear 2 processing (see step 150IWS015) executed when a RAM abnormality occurs.

In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the serial ratio, the combination ratio, and the base and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the serial ratio and Information for performance display such as winning ratio, base, etc., and setting value information are retained without being cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is referred to as a clear storage area 1.

In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the storage area of the RAM 102 other than the area for storing the performance display information such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base is cleared, and the performance display of the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base is displayed. Information is retained without being cleared. Further, in the RAM clear 2 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is referred to as a clear storage area 2. Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 processing is larger than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 1 processing.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 150IWS016), and proceeds to step 150IWS025. The RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is off (N in step 150IWS012), the setting key 150IW051 is off (N in step 150IWS013), and the output signal from the clear switch is off (N). In N of step 150IWS014, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 150IWS017).

Next, the CPU 103 shifts to the loop processing of steps 150IWS018 to S020. In the loop process, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a wait time of 4 ms (step 150IWS018). When the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 shifts to step 150IWS019 and displays a predetermined error (step 150IWS019). For example, the CPU 103 controls the display monitor 150IW029 to display a display indicating that a RAM error has occurred (for example, a display of "E"). Further, the CPU 103 controls the external output of the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer through the external terminal board (step 150IWS020). Then, the processing of step 150IWS018 and thereafter is repeatedly executed.

By executing the processing of steps 150IWS007 to S020, in the feature unit 150IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 150IWS007 and S008, Y in step 150IWS009), an electric power failure or the like occurs during the setting change. In the case (Y in step 150IWS011), the RAM is cleared and the set value after step 150IWS025 is set on condition that the setting key 150IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened. Can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened and the setting key 150IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting change flag is not set (step 150IWS011; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 150IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is ON, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 150IWS022).

In this example, by executing the processing of step 150IWS022 and step 150IWS016, the RAM clear flag is set when the ON state of the clear switch is first detected when the game machine is powered on. Then, after that, before the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt process (game control process) is started, there are multiple situations where it is confirmed whether or not the clear switch ON is detected when the power is turned on. However, it is determined whether the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on by checking whether or not the RAM clear flag is set instead of directly checking the state of the clear switch. (See steps 150 IWS025, S034, S048).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on (step 150IWS023). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 150IW051 is on (step 150IWS024). If the setting key 150IW051 is turned on, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 103 controls to send a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value is executed to the effect control CPU 120 (step 150IWS026). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting change command indicating execution of setting change processing for changing the set value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 150IWS027). ). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (step 150IWS028). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (that is, if an abnormality of the RAM 102 is detected), the CPU 103 causes the setting value determination buffer (a storage area provided in the RAM 102 for storing the current setting value). The set value is set to "1" (step 150IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030. At this time, the CPU 103 resets the RAM abnormality flag.

In addition, when the setting confirmation command or the setting change command is received, the effect control board 12 performs control for notifying that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5). Is displayed, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined mode). In this case, the production control board 12 may be configured to display a "maintenance mode" or the like and shift to the maintenance mode by pressing an operation button for production such as the push button 31B. “Maintenance mode” means, for example, the date and time setting of the real-time clock, the history of various error occurrences (a record of when and what kind of error occurred), and the setting change history (when the setting value was changed and This is the mode in which you can check the recorded settings. When the setting key 150IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also completed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a wait time of 4 ms (step 150IWS030). Then, when the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 shifts to step 150IWS031 and executes power-off processing (step 150IWS031). In the power-off process of step 150IWS031, the CPU 103 executes a process of detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is in the ON state). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off process, when the CPU 103 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 103 executes a process for stopping power supply for storing necessary data (for example, backup flag, checksum) in the backup RAM area. To do.

Next, the CPU 103 identifies the set value stored in the set value confirmation buffer, and displays the identified set value on the display monitor 150IW029 (step 150IWS032). Further, the CPU 103 controls the external output of the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer through the external terminal board (step 150IWS033).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process directly proceeds to step 150IWS043.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag (step 150IWS035) and starts the setting change process. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the first-time setting completion flag indicating that the first time the value has been set in the clear switch buffer has been set since the game machine was powered on (step 150IWS036). The clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether it is in the on state or the off state) of the clear switch. For example, in the clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set when the clear switch is on, and a value of "0" is set when the clear switch is off. If the initial setting completed flag is set (if the value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time since the game machine was powered on), the process proceeds to step 150IWS039.

If the flag set for the first time is not set (that is, if the value has not been set in the clear switch buffer even once since the game machine was powered on), the CPU 103 turns the clear switch buffer on. The value shown (for example, "1") is set (step 150IWS037). Further, the CPU 103 sets the initial setting completion flag (step 150IWS038).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer in the previous clear switch buffer (step 150IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether it is in the on state or the off state) of the clear switch confirmed last time (4 ms before in this example). For example, in the last time clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set when the previously confirmed clear switch is in the on state, and a value of "0" is set in the off state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 150IWS040). Next, the CPU 103 turns off the value set in the clear switch buffer last time (for example, "0") and turns on the value set for the clear switch buffer (for example, "1"). It is confirmed whether or not (step 150IWS041).

If the value previously set in the clear switch buffer is off and the value previously set in the clear switch buffer is on, the CPU 103 updates the set value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029. At the same time as displaying, it is stored in the set value confirmation buffer (update storage for the set value already stored) (step 150IWS042). For example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 is updated to “2” and the set value “2” is stored in the set value determination buffer. When "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 is updated to "3" and the set value "3" is stored in the set value determination buffer. When "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 150IW029, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 is updated to "1" and the set value "1" is stored in the set value determination buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 150IW051 is turned on (step 150IWS043). If the setting key 150IW051 remains on, the process proceeds to step 150IWS030, the processes of steps 150IWS030 to S043 are repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key 150IW051 is off, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, and proceeds to step 150IWS044.

When the RAM clear flag is not set by executing the processing of the above steps 150IWS025 to S043 (that is, when the clear switch is not turned on when the gaming machine is powered on) (steps 150IWS025 and S034). N), the setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 150IWS026), and the setting confirmation process (particularly step 150IWS032) is performed, but the setting change process is not performed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is set (that is, when the clear switch is turned on when the game machine is powered on) (Y in steps 150IWS025 and S034), a setting change command is transmitted (step 150IWS027). At the same time, a setting confirmation process (particularly step 150IWS032) and a setting change process (particularly 150IWS035-S042) are performed.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) in the security information timer for setting the output period of the security signal (step 150IWS044). In this example, when the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the external output of the security signal is started by executing the process of step 150IWS033. The security information timer is set in step 150IWS044, and the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the value of the security information timer, so that the security signal continues until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And output to the outside.

On the other hand, in this example, the security signal is externally output even when a RAM abnormality or the like occurs by executing the process of step 150IWS020, but in this case, the power supply to the gaming machine is reset. The security signal is continuously output to the outside until it is done.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the setting change flag (step 150IWS045). Further, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 (step 150IWS046). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 150IWS047).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 150IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to the recovery process of step 150IWS049. The processing of steps 150IWS049 and S050 in the characteristic unit 150IW is the same as the processing of steps S6 and S7 shown in FIG.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process to clear the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 (150IWS051). The processing of steps 150IWS052 to S055 in the characteristic unit 150IW is the same as the processing of steps S9 to S12 shown in FIG.

FIG. 20-11 is an explanatory diagram of a process executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic unit 150IW, as shown in FIG. 20-11, the clear switch is turned on when the setting key 150IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 150IW090 is turned on). If so, the setting confirmation process (especially step 150IWS032) and the setting change process (especially 150IWS035 to S042) are executed, the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 150IWS051)) is executed, and the clear switch is off. For example, only the setting confirmation process (particularly step 150IWS032) is executed and the restoration process (step 150IWS049) is executed. If the setting key 150IW051 is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 150IWS051)) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, Only the restoration process (step 150IWS049) is executed.

Next, a display mode of the display monitor 150IW029 in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 20-12(A) and FIG. 20-12(B), when the power is turned off (power is cut) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game hall, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 150IW029 ends. When the big winning game is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing of turning off the power, the big prize hole is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12(C), when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 150IW051 is turned on. The setting check process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 150IW029.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 20-12(D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the clear switch by the store clerk or the like in the game hall in the setting change process. Each time it is performed, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the clear switch is operated, it is updated as 1→2→3→1→... ). Further, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12(E), the CPU 103 turns off the display monitor 150IW029 based on that the setting key 150IW051 has been turned off by the operation of the clerk or the like in the amusement hall, thereby turning on the amusement hall. The clerk or the like is notified that the new setting value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20-12(A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory about the big hit is erased, the special winning opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process and becomes in a state in which a game can be played, that is, a variation display result, a big hit type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change process in the characteristic unit 150IW, an example is shown in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 150IW029, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 150IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value that is most unfavorable to the player (“1” in the case of this characteristic unit 150IW) or the most advantageous to the player You may make it display a setting value ("3" in case of this characteristic part 150IW).

In the example shown in FIG. 20-12, the setting value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display on the display monitor 150IW029 when confirming or changing the setting value. Without being limited to this mode, for example, the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 150IW029 may be used to display the set value. Further, for example, the set value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor 150IW029. In this case, for example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 150IW029 displays 4-digit "-S-1", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 150IW029 shows "-S-2". May be displayed, or if the set value is "3", the display monitor 150IW029 may display "-S-3" in four digits. Further, for example, the set value may be displayed on all four-digit displays of the display monitor 150IW029. For example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 150IW029 displays four digits of "1111", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 150IW029 displays four digits of "2222". May be.

(Special symbol normal processing)
Next, the process of the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the feature unit 150IW will be described. 20-13 and 20-14 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the summed pending storage number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) (step 150IWS101). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step 150IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 150 IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 150IWS104).

By performing the processing of steps 150IWS102 to S104, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol in this feature unit 150IW. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in accordance with the order of starting winning in which the game balls win the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol It may be configured to execute and.

Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 150IWS105). Specifically, the CPU 103, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved memories=1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 150IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the storage area of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the content of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is shifted.

That is, the CPU 103, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved memories=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages=n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved storages=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers (or the respective second reserved memory numbers) are always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number)=1, 2, 3, 4 and the order.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step 150IWS107). The CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 150IWS108). As described above, in the characteristic part 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on by executing the process of step 150 IWS047. The setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of 150 IWS 108.

In this example, the same setting value command is transmitted when the setting value command is transmitted in step 150IWS047 and when the setting value command is transmitted in step 150IWS108, but the setting value command is different. It may be configured to send a command. For example, in step 150IWS047, a command that directly specifies a setting value (for example, commands 9E01(H) to 9E03(H) in response to the setting values “1” to “3”) is transmitted, while in step 150IWS108, the setting value is set. It may be configured such that identifiable fluctuation pattern commands are transmitted and the fluctuation pattern commands are prepared for the number of set values (for example, for the set value "1", commands 1C00(H) to The command 2C00(H)-is prepared as the variation pattern command at the setting value "2", and the command 3C00(H)-is prepared as the variation pattern command at the setting value "3".

Further, in the case of the above-described configuration, if different variation pattern commands are transmitted for each set value even when the same variation pattern is used, the total number of variation patterns×the number of set values (3 in this example) ) Minute variation pattern command is required, which may increase the data capacity. Therefore, for example, the setting value command may be transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern commands corresponding to the specific variation pattern may be provided with the variation pattern commands corresponding to the number of setting values. Good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are changed pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. May be provided.

In this example, the same set value command is sent for the set value command (see step 150IWS047) sent when the power is turned on and the set value command (see step 150IWS108) sent at the start of fluctuation. It is not limited to various forms. For example, even if the set value command for power-on and the set value command for fluctuation start are configured as separate commands and different set value commands are transmitted at power-on and at fluctuation start Good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that combines the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. Good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted when the set value is “3”.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and depending on which setting value is set on the effect control CPU 120 side. It may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. Alternatively, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected with a setting value of 3, or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 may have the same variation time, but may be configured to have different presence/absence of pseudo stations, number of pseudo stations, presence/absence of reach, and type. Further, in this case, for example, when the set value command is not normally received, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the set value command is not normally received, a dedicated selection ratio is selected. The variation pattern may be selected with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designating command to the effect control board 12 according to the current game state (step 150IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designating command in the case of the probability variation state, and controls to transmit a time saving state background designation command in the case of the time saving state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or a small hit determination value (see FIG. 20-4) with the random number value MR1 and, when they match, determines to make a big hit or a small hit. The program to execute. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 150IWS110), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 150IWS111). When it is determined to be a small hit (Y in step 150IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 150IWS112), and proceeds to step 150IWS116.

If the value of the random number MR1 does not match either the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (N of step 150IWS111), that is, if it is out of alignment, the process directly proceeds to step 150IWS116.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 150 IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is the jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 20-5) to determine the type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A , "Big hit type B" or "big hit type C") is determined as a big hit type (step 150 IWS114).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 150IWS115). For example, when the big hit type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 150IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is a falling symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, "7" which is a big hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, you may decide to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to the big hit type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5" which is a small hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 150IWS117).

(Production mode change processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the characteristic unit 150IW will be described. 20-15 is a flowchart showing a part of effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 150IW. In the characteristic control unit 150IW, in the effect control main process, when the effect control random number updating process of step S77 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change process of changing the effect mode (step 150IWS201), and thereafter. It returns to the process of step S73.

In the present characteristic part 150IW, it is possible to control in three types of effect modes A to C, and for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the notice production and reach production are different. In the effect mode change process of step 150IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the performance control board 12, the performance mode may be changed based on the fact that a predetermined day or time is reached based on the date and time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, the lottery process based on a random number may be executed to change the effect mode based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 150IW201, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode, for example, the flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change may be set and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. For example, when changing to the effect mode A, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode B is changed, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode C is changed, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

The way of changing the effect mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as effect mode A→effect mode B→effect mode C→effect mode A→. You may make it change randomly from the modes A to C.

(Command analysis process)

20-16 and 20-17 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 150IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 150IWS302). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 150IWS303). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the set value command (step 150IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 150 IWS 305). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power of the gaming machine is turned on (step 150IWS306).

In the feature unit 150IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by power, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are supplied to the gaming machine. Cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, and the processing is started with the setting value command reception flag cleared. It Since the effect control board 12 is activated in a state where the set value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when the setting confirmation process or the recovery process is executed. The configuration may be configured so that the set value command is always transmitted when the power is turned on.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 150IW, the set value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting change processing is performed. However, the set value command is normally transmitted due to missing command or garbled data. If not received, the process of step 150 IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in the characteristic unit 150IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each variable display. Therefore, the processing of step 150IWS305 is performed based on the received set value command. It can be executed so that the set value is stored in the set value storage area.

In addition, even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the set value command is read on the side of the production control CPU 120, the set value command is changed to the set value command. It may be configured to determine whether or not the included setting value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any one of “1” to “3”, but includes a value that cannot be set such as “5” or “10”. If the setting value command is abnormal, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 side stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and when a new set value command is received thereafter, the new set value command is used. If the set value shown does not match the previously stored set value, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred and an abnormality may be determined. Then, even when it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command is not normally received, and the effect is limited according to the processing method shown in the characteristic unit 150IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial result setting)
In the feature control unit 150IW, when one of the initialization designation command and the command for restoration is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis processing on the side of the effect control board 12, a predetermined initial appearance result is displayed on the image display device 5. (Specifically, a combination of decorative patterns, which is displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) is controlled (hereinafter, also referred to as an initial appearance).

If the received production control command is the initialization designation command or the command at the time of restoration (step 150IWS307), the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS308). When the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 stores it in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value that is set, by using the initial hit determination table, even initial hits (for example, “246” or “224”, etc.) that is a combination of even decoration patterns and odd decoration designs are combined. It is determined to be one of an odd initial number (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial number that is a combination of decorative symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) (step 150IWS309). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

FIG. 20-18 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the initial result determination table. In step 150IWS309, using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 20-18(A), a lottery process based on a random number is performed in accordance with the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, and the initial value is determined. Determine the outcome. In the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. 20-18(A), the odds of initial outcomes are determined to be higher in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the start of the game, if the odd initial number is displayed, it means that the setting has been changed, and the set value is advantageous compared with the case where the even initial number is displayed. Will be suggested to be set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-18(A), the special initial appearance may be decided only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the game is started, it is determined that the setting has been changed and the setting value is "3". With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game can be made interested, and the motivation to play the game can be given from an early time zone of the business hours of the game store, and the interest can be enhanced.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or garbled data), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 150IWS310). Whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting value is “1” and determines the initial result by using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 20-18(A) (step 150IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

By executing the processing of steps 150IWS310 to S311, the characteristic unit 150IW is the most unfavorable setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. The initial result is determined to be "1". As shown in FIG. 20-18(A), with respect to the set value “1”, the odds of being determined as odd initial hits are the lowest, and there is no case of being determined as special initial hits. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the player is discouraged by displaying an odd-numbered initial result or a special initial result despite the disadvantageous set value, and the interest in the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS312). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result by using the initial result determination table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS314.

FIG. 20-18(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial result determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-18(B), in the initial result determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined as an odd initial result as compared with the case of the setting value “3” that is most advantageous for the player. The percentage is low, and there is no case where it is decided to be a special initial result.

By executing the processing of steps 150IWS312 to S313, in the characteristic unit 150IW, a disadvantageous setting value is set when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is C. Despite the fact that odd initial numbers and special initial numbers are displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial result determined in steps 150IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 150IWS314).

On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial outcome to be an even initial outcome and the image display device 5 In step 1, control is performed to display an even-numbered initial result (step 150IWS315).

By executing the process of step 150IWS315, the feature section 150IW uniformly displays even initial numbers when the set value command is not normally received and the production mode is B. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by displaying odd initial numbers and special initial numbers despite the disadvantageous set values, and to prevent a decline in interest in the game. I have to.

Even when the setting value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, it may be configured to be able to determine the odd initial winning symbol at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the determination rate of the odd-numbered initial-drawing symbols is set lower than the setting value "1" of the initial-numbering determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the eye symbol.

In this example, the case where the set value command is not normally received and the even initial number is uniformly displayed in the production mode B is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and in the production mode B, when the set value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of symbols "????" as the initial result. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial result. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest the setting value in any form may be displayed as the initial result.

Further, the processing when the set value command is not successfully received (or when the set value is not normally stored) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 150IWS308, the setting value “1” may be stored in the setting value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. In addition, for example, it is configured to store a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value “4”) indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally in the setting value storage area and determine the initial result. Good.

If the received production control command is a setting value abnormality error command (step 150IWS316), the production control CPU 120 executes setting value abnormality error notification (step 150IWS317). For example, the CPU 120 for effect control displays a character display such as "A setting value error is occurring" on the image display device 5, or outputs a voice or an error sound indicating the setting value error from the speakers 8L and 8R. It outputs and controls the game effect lamp 9 and the LED to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the set value abnormality error is notified, the loudspeaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound with a maximum volume and an error sound, and the game effect lamp 9 and the LED emit light with the maximum brightness (for example, of a full-color LED). In this case, it is desirable to emit white light.

If the received production control command is a variation pattern command (production control command that specifies a variation pattern) (step 150IWS320), the production control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the RAM as a variation pattern command. Store in the area (step 150 IWS321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 150IWS322).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (effect control command for specifying whether to make a big hit or small hit, big hit type, small hit type) (step 150IWS323), for effect control The CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step 150IWS324).

If the received production control command is the design confirmation designation command (production control command that designates that the stop design of the decorative design is fixedly displayed) (step 150IWS325), the production control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag ( Step 150 IWS 326).

If the received production control command is a big hit start designation command (a production control command that specifies the start of a big hit game) (step 150IWS327), the production control CPU 120 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step 150IWS328).

If the received production control command is a big hit end designation command (a production control command that specifies the end of a big hit game) (step 150IWS329), the effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step 150IWS330).

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 150IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS301.

Although the characteristic part 150IW is configured not to display the odd initial number when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, the odd initial number may be displayed. Good. Also in this case, the odd number initial odds may be determined differently according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

Also, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd-numbered initial numbers and even-numbered initial numbers, an initial number that denies the possibility of a specific setting value (for example, the possibility of a setting value of 1 is denied, A value 2 or a set value 3 is confirmed), or an initial result that a specific set value is confirmed may be provided and displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, when the specific initial result is displayed by not determining the specific initial result, the possibility of the set value 1 is denied, and the set value 2 or It is decided that the set value is 3. Further, for example, only when the setting value is 3, the specific initial result is determined, and when the specific initial result is displayed, it is determined that the setting value is 3. .. Further, when determining the initial outcome, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
In the characteristic part 150IW, the set value is configured to be changeable, and as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, during the game (for example, , It is possible to execute the suggestion during the game executed during the variation display of the decorative pattern, the setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the variation pattern described above, and the suggestion during the big hit executed during the big hit (for example, during the big hit game) Has been done. It should be noted that in the feature unit 150IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of kinds of effect modes having different hint reliability, for example, the type of the setting suggestion effect The reliability of suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of suggestion may be higher in the order of pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game, or pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect during big hit. The suggestion reliability during the game may be higher in the order of suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect before game, or suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect before game. Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion production can be set. For example, the manager of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, pre-game suggestion effect or initial appearance effect in which setting change is suggested), or the execution rate. The setting may be changed to lower (or increase). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operation means such as the push button 31B or the operation means such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine (only the administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Variable display start wait processing)
20-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 150IWS501).

When the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the customer wait demonstration effect if it is in progress (step 150IWS502, step 150IWS503). The control for ending the display of the displayed puzzle display is performed (step 150IWS504). The puzzle display is started by executing the process of step 150IWS518 described later.

Then, the variable pattern command reception flag is reset (step 150IWS505), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 150IWS506), and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

When the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (N in step 150IWS507). It is confirmed (step 150 IWS508). In step 150IWS508, for example, when the timer (for example, set to 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “miss”) ends, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Also, when the timer is not set (that is, after the power is turned on, the variable display has not been executed even once and before the start of the game), it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. In other words, if the variable display is not executed for a predetermined period of time (and is not controlled to the big hit game state) or before the game is started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 150IWS509). That is, in step 150IWS509, it is confirmed whether the game has not started yet.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS510). When the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, Using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestive effect is executed (step 150IWS511). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS516.

In the characteristic part 150IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp becomes the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is controlled, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer waiting demonstration effect including the mode is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

FIG. 20-20 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table. In step 150IWS511, lottery processing based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-20(A), Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined. In the pre-game suggestive effect determination table of FIG. 20-20(A), determination values are assigned in order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” so that the rate at which the pre-game suggestive effect is executed becomes higher. Has been. In addition, the determination value is assigned such that the ratio determined in the second effect mode becomes higher in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and that the advantageous setting value is set by being executed in the second effect mode rather than in the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-20(A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is “3”.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or garbled data), production control CPU 120 confirms whether the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 150IWS512). Whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting value is “1” and uses the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. And the effect mode is determined (step 150IWS513). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS516.

By executing the processing of steps 150IWS512 to S513, in the characteristic unit 150IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 20-20(A), with respect to the setting value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and the ratio is not determined as the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS514). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS515). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS516.

FIG. 20-20(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-20(B), in the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestive effect as compared with the case of the setting values “2” and “3”. The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and there is no case where it is determined as the third effect mode.

By executing the processing of steps 150IWS514 to S515, in the characteristic unit 150IW, a disadvantageous setting value is set when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is rather discouraged, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demo effect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 150IWS511, S513, and S515 (step 150IWS516). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS518.

On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 150IWS517. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 150IWS514, in the feature unit 150IW, if the set value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is B, the pre-game suggestion production is not executed, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed to disappoint the player despite the disadvantageous set value being set, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of suggestive effect.

It should be noted that the execution ratio is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 20-20(A), and only in a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes, the ratio to be executed differs depending on the set value. You may

In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that the setting value is a specific setting value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, setting is performed when the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) is executed by preventing the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) from being determined. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is confirmed. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

In the characteristic part 150IW, the pre-game suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestive effect (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode according to the set value. (Including 3 effect modes), the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode differ depending on the set value, and only the specific effect mode depends on the set value. This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

Note that the characteristic unit 150IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect when the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the set value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable even when the setting is not changed. In this case, the presence/absence of execution of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing the effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 20-20(C) is a pre-game suggestive effect determination table used when a command for restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-20(A) and the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-20(C), when the command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change When not performed, the pre-game suggestive effect is executed at a lower rate and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is smaller than when the setting is changed. By doing so, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestive effect can be made different between when the setting is changed and when the setting is not changed.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 150IWS517). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

When the process of step 150 IWS 517 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, an execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestive effect (in-game suggestive effect or big hit suggestive effect), execution content (effect mode during execution), and the like. A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the process of step 150IWS517 is executed, the customer waiting de-effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer-waiting demonstration effect, The image display device 5 may display the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (initial effect effect effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, big hit suggestion effect, etc.) and execution content (effect mode at the time of execution) are shown. It is also possible to store the information and execute the effect of inferring the set value from the information and notifying the set value. It should be noted that this effect notifies the expected setting value (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined reference from the execution situation of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. ..

In the characteristic portion 150IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 150IWS509 to 150IWS516. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is shown during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the process of step 150IWS517, but the information regarding the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game can be made to be interested, and the motivation to play the game can be given from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and the interest can be increased. .. Not limited to the example of the characteristic unit 150IW, for example, by using a real-time clock or the like, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time period (for example, from 9 am to 11 am). Good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include information about the suggestion effect during game during the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the feature unit 150IW, the number of executions and execution contents of the setting suggestion effect is accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game. It may be configured to do so. In addition, when a player uses a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph a two-dimensional code displayed on a gaming machine and sends it to a web server on the Internet, the web server uses the received information. You may make it manage the game history of a player, and perform the process which gives a predetermined privilege according to the game history. The player may access the Web server using the mobile terminal (or analyze the two-dimensional code) to acquire the execution history information and display the execution history information on the display device included in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information using the mobile terminal, so that the setting suggesting image suggesting the setting value may be displayed on the display device included in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated based on a predetermined reference from the execution history information is calculated, and a setting suggestion image indicating the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. May be.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the puzzle display on the image display device 5 based on the values of the first piece counter to the third piece counter (step 150IWS518).

In this example, there may be a case where a puzzle effect in which jigsaw puzzle pieces are gradually aligned is displayed while the decorative design is being displayed. When the puzzle effect is executed, an effect in which any one piece of puzzles 1 to 3 is arranged one by one is executed every time the puzzle effect is executed once. Then, after a plurality of puzzle effects have been executed, it is suggested that the setting value is "1" when the puzzle 1 is finally completed with all pieces, and the setting value is set when the puzzle 2 is completed with all pieces. It is suggested that it is "2", and when the puzzle 3 is completed with all the pieces, it is suggested that the set value is "3".

In addition, in this example, the puzzle is not always displayed in the variable display of the decorative pattern every time, but only the variable display determined to execute the puzzle effect (that is, the variable display in which one of the puzzle pieces increases). Only) the puzzle is displayed. On the other hand, when the variable display of the decorative design is not executed and the customer waiting demonstration display is being displayed, the puzzle display is displayed on the image display device 5 by executing the process of step 150IWS518, and the puzzle 1 The gathering state of each piece of ~3 can be confirmed.

The first piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces gathered in the puzzle 1. The second piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces gathered in the puzzle 2. The third piece counter is a counter for counting the number of pieces gathered in the puzzle 3. In this example, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by power, the values of the first piece counter to the third piece counter stored in the RAM 122 are stopped from being supplied to the gaming machine. When the game machine is powered on, it is assumed that the value of the first piece counter to the third piece counter is 0.

In step 150IWS518, the image of puzzle 1 in which the number of pieces corresponding to the value of the first piece counter is collected is displayed, and the image of puzzle 2 in which the number of pieces corresponding to the value of the second piece counter is collected is displayed, The puzzle display is displayed by displaying an image of the puzzle 3 in which a number of pieces corresponding to the value of the third piece counter are collected.

(Variable display start setting process)
20-21 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 150IWS601). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read in step 150IWS601 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (stop). (Symbol) is determined (step 150 IWS602). That is, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the process of step 150IWS602 to display the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (pattern) is realized. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop design of the decorative design in the decorative design display result storage area. In step 150IWS602, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on only the variation pattern command. ..

In step 150IWS602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates the probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which the three symbols are arranged in the same odd number as the stop symbol. In addition, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same even number as a stop symbol. To do.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative designs of the small hit design according to the small hit type designated by the display result designation command. .. In this example, in the case of the small hit type A, the combination of "135" is determined as the small hit symbol, and in the case of the small hit type B, the combination of "357" is determined as the small hit symbol, and the small hit. In the case of type C, the combination of "579" is determined as the small hit symbol.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a deviation, a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined.

When the pseudo pattern is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 150IWS602 that a chance eye symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo pattern. , A combination of a big hit design that does not reach and one design that is offset by one) are also determined.

The production control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop design, and uses the stop design determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the design and the numerical value are associated with each other to determine the stop design of the design. decide. That is, the stop design is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative designs corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the variation number counter for counting the number of times the variation display of the decorative pattern has been performed since the game machine was powered on (step 150IWS603). In this example, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by the power source, the value of the variation counter stored in the RAM 122 is cleared when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and the game is played. It is assumed that the value of the variation counter is 0 when the machine is powered on.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes in-game suggestive effect determination processing for determining the presence or absence of the in-game suggestive effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS604).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a puzzle effect setting process for setting the presence/absence of a puzzle effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS605).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the suggestion during game or the puzzle effect if the variation pattern and the execution of the suggestion during game or the puzzle effect are determined (step 150IWS606). .. Then, the CPU 120 for effect control starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 150IWS607).

The process table is a table in which process data that the production control CPU 120 refers to when performing control of the production device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (effect parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating the form of each variation constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern are described. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer set value is set with the change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decorative pattern in a variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12. The process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In the process table used when performing effect control for a variation pattern involving reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. It should be noted that instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect. May be.

If execution of the in-game suggestive effect is determined in the in-game suggestive effect determining process of step 150IWS604, a process table including the in-game suggestive effect is selected in step 150IWS606, and step 150IWS608 is selected in accordance with the selected process table. And the effect display during variable display (step S172) is executed, so that the suggestion during game is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

If execution of the puzzle effect is determined in the puzzle effect setting process of step 150IWS605, a process table including the puzzle effect is selected in step 150IWS606, and step 150IWS608 and variable display effect process according to the selected process table. By executing (step S172), the puzzle effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), an effect device (image display device 5 as effect part, effect part. Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts is executed (step 150IWS608).

In the characteristic unit 150IW, the effect control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command in a one-to-one manner. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variation time timer to a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command (step 150IWS609). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 150IWS610), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(During game suggestion production decision processing)
20-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the game suggested effect determination process (step 150IWS604). The in-game suggestive effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the game suggested effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 selects the first in-game suggested effect determination table when the special period is in effect (Y in step 150IWS701) (step 150IWS702), and is not in the special period. In the case (N of step 150IWS701), the second in-game suggestive effect determination table is selected (step 150IWS703). For example, when the setting change end command or the setting value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag may be reset. For example, by checking the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 150IWS701 whether or not the special period is in progress.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS704). When the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, By using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence/absence of execution of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are determined (step 150IWS705).

20-23(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestive effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 20-23(B) is a second in-game suggestive effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-23(A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1”<“2”<“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion during game is executed, so that it is suggested that the advantageous setting value is set.

As for the second effect mode (appearance of the mini characters A and B), the ratio of execution in the order of the setting values “1”<“2”<“3” is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of the mini character A). The determination value is assigned such that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values becomes larger than that of the set value. That is, the second effect mode has higher reliability with respect to the setting value being more advantageous than the first effect mode.

Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect having a high reliability is executed only during the special period. Is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance interest.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20-23(A) and (B), the third effect mode (character C appears) may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting value is "3".

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or garbled data), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 150IWS706). Whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the set value is “1” and uses the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table to determine whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode ( Step 150 IWS707).

By executing the processing of steps 150IWS706 to S707, the characteristic unit 150IW is the most unfavorable setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the rate of determining to execute the in-game suggestive effect is low and the rate of being determined as the second effect mode. Is the lowest, and there is no case where it is determined to be the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the suggestion during game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS708). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine the presence or absence of execution of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 150IWS709).

20-23(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the in-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-23(C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the proportion determined to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the setting value “3”. There is no case where it is determined to be the third effect mode.

By executing the processing of steps 150IWS708 to S709, the characteristic unit 150IW sets an unfavorable set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the in-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly ends the process. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 150IWS708, in the feature unit 150IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is B, the in-game suggestion production is not executed, Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by executing the suggestive effect during game, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the in-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the in-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-23(A) and (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of in-game suggestive effect.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that the setting value is a specific setting value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, setting is performed when the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) is executed by preventing the specific performance mode (for example, the second performance mode) from being determined. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is confirmed. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

In the feature part 150IW, it is possible to execute the suggestion during game at different rates according to the set value, but this is the suggestion during game (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode according to the set value). (Including 3 effect modes), the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode differ depending on the set value, and only the specific effect mode depends on the set value. This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

In addition, in the characteristic part 150IW, a special mode and a non-special period are configured to be able to execute the in-game suggestion effect in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode), but it is not limited to such a configuration. Alternatively, a different mode suggestive effect during game may be executable. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

In addition, the feature unit 150IW is configured such that the presence/absence of execution of in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are different depending on whether it is a special period or a non-special period and a set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, a variation time specified by a variation pattern, presence/absence of reach production, type of reach production, presence/absence of pseudo continuous production, type of pseudo continuous production, and display result become a big hit. Depending on whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, the effect mode when executing may be different.

For example, the in-game suggestion effect may be executable only when the change pattern includes at least the reach effect (that is, the change time is longer than the non-reach change pattern). Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the super reach B and the variation pattern including the super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than the super reach B, the latter has a higher rate of executing the in-game suggestion effect. Alternatively, the reliability when the suggestion during game is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the suggestive effect during game is executed is high, and the reliability when the suggestive effect is executed is high. It may be higher.

Further, for example, in a variation pattern including a pseudo-relational effect and a variation pattern that does not include a pseudo-relational effect (or the number of pseudo-repetition times is smaller than that in the former), the former is more likely to perform the in-game suggestive effect. It may be set higher, the reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be higher, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed becomes higher and The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and in the variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may be configured to have a higher ratio in which the in-game suggestive effect is executed. The reliability when the medium suggestive effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestive effect is executed may be increased and the reliability when the intermediate suggestive effect is executed may be increased. ..

(Puzzle production setting process)
20-24 and 20-25 are flowcharts showing an example of the puzzle effect setting process (step 150IWS605). In the puzzle effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a puzzle completion flag indicating that any one of the puzzles 1 to 3 has been completed is set (step 150IWS801). If the puzzle completion flag is set, the puzzle effect setting process ends.

By executing the processing of step 150 IWS801, in this example, the puzzle effect may be executed until one of the puzzles 1 to 3 is completed after the game machine is powered on. When any one of the puzzles is completed, the puzzle effect is not executed thereafter (that is, any one of the puzzles is completed so that two or more puzzles are not completed).

In addition, you may comprise so that two or more puzzles may be completed, not limited to the aspect shown in this example.

If the puzzle completion flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using a puzzle effect determination table for determining whether to execute the puzzle effect, and executes the puzzle effect. It is determined whether or not (step 150 IWS802). 20-26 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the puzzle effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 20-26, in this example, it is determined that the puzzle effect is executed with a probability of 1% when the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed.

Generally, in a game store, when a game is continuously played between the opening of the game store and the closing of the game store, the variable display of the decorative design can be executed up to about 3000 times (however, the game machine is displayed). There is a difference depending on the model). In this example, the maximum number of pieces in puzzles 1 to 3 is 5 pieces respectively, and when any one of the puzzles 1 to 3 has 5 pieces, the puzzle is completed. In this example, even if the puzzle does not have all the pieces, the judgment values are assigned so that it is easy to get the pieces up to 3 to 4 pieces, so that it is possible to complete one of the puzzles 1 to 3. It takes about 11 to 13 times to execute the puzzle effect, and since the determination rate for executing the puzzle effect is 1%, it generally takes about 1100 to 1300 times to execute the variable display of the decorative pattern. Therefore, in this example, after the amusement shop is opened, it is designed that one of the puzzles will be completed in about the afternoon. Note that the puzzle may be completed in the morning without being limited to such an aspect.

In this example, the case where one type of puzzle effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-26 is used is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a different puzzle effect determination table may be used to change the puzzle effect execution ratio depending on the time of day, the number of times of variable display execution, and the setting by the game shop staff.

Further, in this example, the case where the maximum number of pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 is 5 pieces is shown, but the number of pieces is not limited to such a mode, and for example, 3 pieces, 4 pieces, or 6 pieces or more. It may be configured to exist. Further, the maximum number of pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 does not necessarily have to be the same number, and for example, the maximum number of pieces of puzzle 1 is 4 while the maximum number of pieces of puzzle 3 is 5. The maximum number of pieces may differ for each puzzle.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is decided to execute the puzzle effect (step 150IWS803). When it is decided not to execute the puzzle effect, the puzzle effect setting process is ended as it is. When it is determined to execute the puzzle effect, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the value of the variation counter is 1000 or less (step 150IWS804). If the value of the variation number counter is 1000 or less (that is, if the number of times the variation display of the decorative pattern is executed after the power is turned on of the game machine is 1000 or less), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the puzzle effect. The puzzle effect mode determination table A is selected as the table for determination (step 150IWS805).

If the value of the variation counter is not less than 1000 (that is, if the variation display of the decorative pattern from the power-on of the gaming machine is executed more than 1000), the effect control CPU 120 stores it in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122. It is confirmed whether or not the set value being set is the set value "1" (step 150IWS806). If the set value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 selects the puzzle effect mode determination table B as a table for determining the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS807).

If the setting value is not "1", the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 is the setting value "2" (step 150IWS808). If the setting value is "2", the effect control CPU 120 selects the puzzle effect mode determination table C as a table for determining the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS809).

If it is neither the set value “2” (that is, if the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 is the set value “3”), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the puzzle effect. As the table, the puzzle effect mode determination table D is selected (step 150IWS810).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the puzzle effect mode determination table selected in steps 150IWS805, S807, S809, and S810 to determine the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS811).

20-27 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table. Of these, FIG. 20-27(A) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table A selected in step 150IWS805. 20-27(B) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table B selected in step 150IWS807. 20-27(C) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table C selected in step 150IWS809. 20-27(D) shows a specific example of the puzzle effect mode determination table D selected in step 150IWS810.

As shown in FIG. 20-27, in each of the puzzle effect mode determination tables A to D, the determination values for the puzzle effect 1, puzzle effect 2, and puzzle effect 3 as the effect mode (type) of the puzzle effect, respectively. Has been allocated. The puzzle effect 1 is a puzzle effect performed in a mode in which one of the puzzles 1 to 3 of the puzzle 1 is increased. In addition, the puzzle effect 2 is a puzzle effect performed in a mode in which one of the puzzles 1 to 3 of the puzzles 1 to 3 is increased. Further, the puzzle effect 3 is a puzzle effect performed in a mode in which the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 out of the puzzles 1 to 3 increases by one.

As shown in FIG. 20-27(A), in the puzzle effect mode determination table A, the determination rate of the puzzle effect 3 is 2 to 3% higher than the determination rates of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the game machine is turned on, until the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, the rate of the puzzle effect 3 being executed and the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 being increased by 1 is slightly high. Therefore, in this example, for example, even if the set value that has been set is the set value "1" which is low in the degree of advantage, the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 having the high degree of advantage is up to a predetermined number (for example, 3 to 4). Are easy to get together.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-27(B), in the puzzle effect mode determination table B, the determination rate of the puzzle effect 1 is 1% higher than the determination rates of the other puzzle effects 2 and 3. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the game machine is turned on, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, and when the setting value is set to "1", the puzzle effect 1 is executed and the puzzle The rate at which one piece increases by one is slightly higher.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-27(C), in the puzzle effect mode determination table C, the determination rate of the puzzle effect 2 is 1% higher than the determination rates of the other puzzle effects 1 and 3. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the game machine is turned on, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, and when the setting value is set to "2", the puzzle effect 2 is executed and the puzzle The rate at which 2 pieces increase by 1 is slightly higher.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-27(D), in the puzzle effect mode determination table D, the determination rate of the puzzle effect 3 is 1% higher than the determination rates of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2. Therefore, in this example, after the power of the game machine is turned on, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, and when the setting value is set to "3", the puzzle effect 3 is executed and the puzzle The rate at which the number of 3 pieces increases by 1 is slightly higher.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-27, in any of the puzzle effect mode determination tables A to D, the execution ratio of any one of the puzzle effects 1 to 3 is at most 1 to 3 as compared with the other puzzle effects. Since it is only high, it is easy to collect all the pieces of puzzles 1 to 3 to some extent, and it is a puzzle other than the puzzle in which the maximum number of puzzles 1 to 3 (5 pieces in this example) is finally prepared. However, at least 3 to 4 pieces are configured to be easily aligned.

Note that the way of configuring the puzzle effect mode determination table is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, it is configured to determine the effect mode of the puzzle effect using different puzzle effect mode determination tables according to the settings of the game shop staff, and to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the puzzle effect. May be. For example, depending on the setting, the pieces of the puzzles 1 to 3 may be evenly arranged to some extent, or a particular puzzle may be made to have pieces more easily than other puzzles or may be changed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 1 has been determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS812). When the puzzle effect 1 is determined, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 is the set value “1” (step 150IWS813). If the set value is "1", the process directly proceeds to step 150IWS815.

If the set value is not "1", the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the value of the first piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS814). If the value of the first piece counter is 4, the process does not move to steps 150IWS815 to S818 but moves to step 150IWS819. That is, in this case, the value of the first piece counter is 4 means that up to four pieces of the puzzle 1 are gathered, and when the puzzle effect 1 is executed, the fifth piece is gathered and the puzzle 1 is collected. Although it will be completed, since the set value that is set is not the set value “1” and the set value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the set value that is actually set, steps 150IWS815- It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the processing of S818.

When the set value is "1" (Y in step 150IWS813) or the value of the first piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS814), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the puzzle effect 1 is executed. The puzzle effect 1 execution flag is set (step 150IWS815). In this example, in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, the process table including the puzzle effect 1 is selected based on that the puzzle effect 1 execution flag is set, and steps are performed according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS608 and the variable display effect processing (step S172), the puzzle effect 1 is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The puzzle effect 1 execution flag is reset when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the first piece counter (step 150IWS816), and confirms whether the value of the first piece counter after addition is 5 (step 150IWS817). If the value of the first piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 120 sets the puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS818).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS819). When the puzzle effect 2 is determined, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 is the set value “2” (step 150IWS820). If the set value is "2", the process directly proceeds to step 150IWS822.

If it is not the set value “2”, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the second piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS821). If the value of the second piece counter is 4, the process does not move to steps 150IWS822 to S825 but moves to step 150IWS826. That is, in this case, the value of the second piece counter is 4 means that up to four pieces of the puzzle 2 have been gathered, and when the puzzle production 2 is executed, the fifth piece is gathered and the puzzle 2 is collected. Although it will be completed, since the set value that is set is not the set value “2” and the set value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the actually set value, step 150 IWS822 to step 150IWS822 It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the processing of S825.

When the setting value is "2" (Y in step 150IWS820) or the value of the second piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS821), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the puzzle effect 2 is to be executed. The puzzle effect 2 execution flag is set (step 150IWS82). In this example, in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, the process table including the puzzle effect 2 is selected based on that the puzzle effect 2 execution flag is set, and steps are performed according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS608 and the variable display effect process (step S172), the puzzle effect 2 is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is assumed that the puzzle effect 2 execution flag is reset when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the second piece counter (step 150IWS823), and confirms whether the value of the second piece counter after addition is 5 (step 150IWS824). If the value of the second piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 120 sets the puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS825).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the puzzle effect 3 has been determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect (step 150IWS826). When the puzzle effect 3 is determined, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 is the set value “3” (step 150IWS827). If the set value is "3", the process directly proceeds to step 150IWS829.

If the setting value is not "3", the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the third piece counter is 4 (step 150IWS828). If the value of the third piece counter is 4, the process of steps 150IWS829 to S832 is not entered and the puzzle effect setting process is ended. That is, in this case, the value of the third piece counter is 4, which means that up to 4 pieces of the puzzle 3 are gathered, and when the puzzle effect 3 is executed, the 5th piece is gathered to form the puzzle 3. Although it will be completed, since the set value that is set is not the set value “3” and the set value suggested in the completed puzzle does not match the set value that is actually set, step 150 IWS829- It is configured to cancel the execution of the puzzle effect without shifting to the processing of S832.

When the set value is "3" (Y in step 150IWS827) or the value of the third piece counter is not 4 (N in step 150IWS828), the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the puzzle effect 3 is to be executed. The puzzle effect 3 execution flag is set (step 150IWS829). In this example, in step 150IWS606 of the variable display start setting process, the process table including the puzzle effect 3 is selected based on that the puzzle effect 3 execution flag is set, and steps are performed according to the selected process table. By executing the 150IWS608 and the variable display effect processing (step S172), the puzzle effect 3 is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The puzzle effect 3 execution flag is reset when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the third piece counter (step 150IWS830), and confirms whether the value of the third piece counter after addition is 5 (step 150IWS831). If the value of the third piece counter is 5, the effect control CPU 120 sets the puzzle completion flag (step 150IWS832).

In this example, the setting values suggested in the completed puzzle do not match the setting values actually set by executing the processing of steps 150 IWS813, S814, S820, S821, S827, and S828. In such a case, the puzzle effect is canceled to prevent such a situation from occurring, but the present invention is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, the step 150IWS811 may be executed again, and the effect mode of the puzzle effect may be determined again until the effect mode of the puzzle effect that does not cause such a mismatch is determined. In addition, for example, it may be configured to redetermine the effect mode of the puzzle effect by using a table excluding the effect mode of the puzzle effect that causes such a mismatch.

Further, in this example, the control is performed so that the set value suggested in the completed puzzle does not coincide with the set value actually set. However, only such a mode is possible. Instead, the set value suggested in the completed puzzle may not necessarily match the set value actually set. For example, when the set value is "3", the percentage of completion of the puzzle 3 is highest, but the puzzle 1 and the puzzle 2 may be completed in some cases.

Also, for the puzzle effect, check whether the set value command reception flag is set (whether or not the set value command is normally received), and if the set value command is not normally received, the game is played. As with the determination of the previous suggestion effect, the suggestion effect during game, and the suggestion effect during big hit, the execution of the puzzle effect may be limited.

(Direction determination process during big hit)
FIG. 20-28 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit midtime effect determination process. The big hit midtime performance determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit mid-game effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 150IWS901). When the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, Whether or not the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the effect is executed are determined (step 150IWS902). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

In step S150IWS902, if the period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the process shown in FIG. When the one big hit medium suggestive effect determination table is selected, and when it is not during the specific period, the second big hit medium suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-29(B) is selected. Then, based on the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table and the set value, the presence/absence of execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are determined. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but it is not limited to this, and for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the last game. It may be the time when the display is started, or the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in the characteristic unit 150IW, the period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as the specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the game start time to the variable display being performed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as the specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and a first specific period (a period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed 50 times) and a second specific period (the 51st change after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a big hit medium suggestive effect determination table in which the presence or absence of the big hit medium suggestive effect and the determination rate of the effect mode are different between the display and the 100th variation display).

20-29 (A), (B), in the first and second big hit medium suggestive effect determination table, the big hit medium suggestive effect is executed in the order of the setting value "1"<"2"<"3". The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, which suggests that the advantageous setting value is set.

Further, in the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period is high. The determination value is assigned so that the difference between the two becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the big hit medium suggestion effect having higher reliability than the non-specific period is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an incentive to play a game in a specific period, and enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the characteristic unit 150IW, the big hit midway suggestion effect (or a particular effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and not in a non-specific period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-29(A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, it is determined that the set value is "3" by executing the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode.

In the present feature part 150IW, when the big hit mid-game suggestive effect is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (A1), the decorative pattern which is a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. After that, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (B1), a dialogue C image (“high setting!?”) 150IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (A1), after the decorative design to be the big hit is stopped and displayed, the figure is displayed. As shown in 20-31 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 150IW105 is displayed.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or garbled data), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 150IWS903). Whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the big hit medium suggestion effect execution and the effect mode by using the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 150 IWS904). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

By executing the processing of steps 150IWS903 to S904, in the characteristic unit 150IW, the setting value which is the most unfavorable setting when the setting value command is not normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not to execute the suggestion during big hit and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 20-29(A) and (B), with respect to the setting value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, despite the disadvantageous set value being set, the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player. It is possible to prevent the situation that the player loses interest in playing games.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 150IWS905). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the effect during the big hit and the effect mode by using the big hit mid-point suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 150IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 150IWS907.

FIG. 20-29(C) is an explanatory view showing an example of a big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-29(C), in the big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the rate itself for determining the big hit medium suggestion effect is low, and the setting value is “2” or “3”. Compared with, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and there is no case where it is determined as the fourth effect mode.

By executing the processing of steps 150IWS905 to S906, the characteristic unit 150IW sets an unfavorable set value in the case where the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C. It is possible to prevent a situation where the big hit medium suggestion production is executed by the second production aspect, the third production aspect, and the third production aspect to cause the player to be discouraged, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 150IWS907. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the suggestive effect during the big hit.

By executing the process of step 150IWS905, in the feature unit 150IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is B, by not performing the big hit suggestion production, Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the suggestion effect during a big hit is executed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the big hit medium suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the big hit medium suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-29(A) and (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of suggestive effect during the big hit.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 20-29(A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 20-29(A), when the big hit occurs in the specific period, the suggestion effect during the big hit is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. May be. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be changed according to the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 20-29(B), regardless of the set value, the proportion in which the suggestion during big hit is not executed is configured to be the same, but if the proportion not executed is different depending on the set value. You may allow it.

In addition, in the characteristic part 150IW, when a big hit is made in a specific period, a big hit mid-range suggestion effect is configured to be executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, The setting suggestion effect (for example, a dialogue image suggesting the set value is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied) may be executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition in the specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, or when a specific super reach effect or a notice effect is executed.

In the feature part 150IW, the big hit medium suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value, but this is the big hit medium suggestive effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect mode). Execution ratio of the production mode and the fourth production mode) is different, the execution ratio of the first production mode, the second production mode, the third production mode and the fourth production mode is different according to the set value, the set value It is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, a third effect mode) according to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform the accessory effect (step 150IWS907).

Here, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 20-30(A1), the movable member 150IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, control for moving the movable member 150IW101 to the front surface of the image display device 5 is performed as shown in FIG. 20-30 (B2).

As shown in FIGS. 20-30(A1) and (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 150IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 produces a suggestion during a big hit. It becomes difficult to see the position where the serif image is displayed. In the present feature part 150IW, since the big hit medium suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at different timings in the fanfare period in the big hit game, the movable member 150IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is a big hit. The serif image displayed by the medium suggestion effect is not obscured. However, during the fanfare period, if the movable member 150IW101 operates due to the accessory effect, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 150IW101, and the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect may be overlooked. Accordingly, in step 150IWS907, by using the character effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-29(D), the character effect is not executed when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestive effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize and reduce the interest. Further, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the big hit mid-game suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize even if the big hit mid-game suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing.

In addition, when the execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the execution timing of either the big hit medium suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the big hit medium effect indication is performed. It may be performed during the ending period) to prevent the suggestion during big hit from being difficult to recognize. In addition, when the execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 150IW101 is changed (for example, control is performed so as not to stop at a position overlapping the serif image by the big hit medium suggestion effect), or the big hit. The display position of the serif image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit medium suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize. Further, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is decided, the execution rate of the accessory effect may be reduced to limit the execution of the accessory effect. In addition, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 20-29(D), the accessory effect may be executed at a low rate even when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence/absence of the light guide plate effect when the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 150IWS908) (step 150IWS909).

Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, there is provided a light guide plate 150IW103 having a light transmitting property capable of transmitting light, and a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from an end face of the light guide plate. It is assumed that the light emitting device is provided with a reflection unit that reflects the light incident from the end surface of the light guide plate 150IW103 into the light guide plate 150IW103 and emits the light to the front surface of the game machine. Then, it is possible to execute a light guide plate effect in which light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 150IW103 to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate production is executed, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (B3), light is emitted from the reflection portion provided in the light guide plate 150IW103 to the front surface of the game machine, and the “big hit” is achieved. Appears. In addition, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5 while the light guide plate effect is being performed.

In step 150IWS909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-29(E), light guide plate effects are executed at different ratios according to the presence or absence of the big hit suggestive effect and the effect mode when it is executed. It Specifically, when the big hit suggestion effect of the first effect mode is performed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the big hit suggestion of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is suggested. When the effect is executed, the proportion of the light guide plate effect executed is reduced. That is, when the big hit medium suggestion effect of the effect mode not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the big hit medium suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to be visually recognized. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (B4), when the dialogue A image (“setting is...”) 150IW104 is displayed in the big hit medium suggestion effect of the first effect mode, the light guide plate effect is executed. If so, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the serif A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having a bad interest in the game, due to the suggestion during the big hit, which is an undesired presentation mode for the player. When the big hit medium suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of one of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate. The effect may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

Next, an aspect of the puzzle effect will be described. 20-32 to 20-34 are illustrations showing an example of the effect mode of the puzzle effect. As shown in FIG. 20-32(A), in the variable display of the decorative design for which the execution of the puzzle effect has not been decided, the effect display of the puzzle effect is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the left middle right decorative pattern is displayed. The variable display of is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 20-32(B), the variation time ends and the stop symbol of the decorative design is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 20-32(C), the next variation of the decorative design. It is assumed that the display has started. In the example shown in FIG. 20-32(C), when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the execution of the puzzle effect is determined and the puzzle effect 2 is determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-32(C), for example, an effect screen (puzzle effect screen) 150IW106 for puzzle effect is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen of the image display device 5, and the puzzle effect is started.

20-32(D) is an enlarged view of the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 shown in FIG. 20-32(C). As shown in FIG. 20-32(D), puzzle effect screen 150IW106 displays puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1), puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3). Also, in the example shown in FIG. 20-32(D), one piece 150IW107-1 has already gathered in the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1), and one piece still gathers in the puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2). However, the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3) shows a case where two pieces have already been gathered.

Next, based on the fact that the puzzle effect 2 is determined, as shown in FIG. 20-33(E), one new piece 150IW108-1 flies in the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 and the puzzle 150IW107( A production is carried out to inspire which one of the puzzle 1) to the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits in. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-33(F), the new piece 150IW108-1 finally fits in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the number of pieces of the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) increases by one. The performance is executed. Then, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished, the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 is erased and the puzzle effect is ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-33(G), it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect has not been decided in the next variable display of the decorative design, and the image display device is shown as shown in FIG. 20-33(G). In 5, the effect display of the puzzle effect is not displayed, but the variable display of the left middle right decorative design is displayed.

Then, thereafter, the puzzle effect is not executed and the variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed, and the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 20-33(H). It is assumed to be in a state. In this example, when the customer waiting demonstration display is in progress, as shown in FIG. 20-33(H), for example, a puzzle display display screen (puzzle display screen) 150IW110 is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen of the image display device 5. Then, the display of the puzzle display is started, and the current state of collection of pieces of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1), the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) is displayed.

After that, the game is started again, the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed a plurality of times, and the puzzle effect is also executed a plurality of times. Then, when the variable display of a certain decorative pattern is started thereafter, it is assumed that the execution of the puzzle effect has been determined and the puzzle effect 2 has been determined as the effect mode of the puzzle effect, and the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 is displayed. It is assumed that the puzzle production has started. 20-34(I) is an enlarged view of the puzzle effect screen 150IW106 displayed in the variable display of the decorative design. In the example shown in FIG. 20-34(I), the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1) has already gathered three pieces 150IW107-1, and the puzzle 150IW108 (Puzzle 2) has already gathered four pieces. The puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3) shows a case where four pieces have already been gathered.

Next, based on the fact that the puzzle effect 2 is determined, as shown in FIG. 20-34(J), one new piece 150IW108-5 flies in the puzzle effect screen 150IW106, and the puzzle 150IW107( A production is carried out to inspire which one of the puzzle 1) to the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits in. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-34(K), the new piece 150IW108-5 finally fits in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the number of pieces of the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) increases by one. The performance is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 20-34(K), the maximum number of pieces in the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) is 5 and the puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2) is completed. At, a character display such as "Puzzle 2 completed!" is displayed. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-34(L), the character "2" also appears in the completed puzzle 150IW108 (puzzle 2), and the set value being set is the set value "2". Is suggested.

In the example shown in FIG. 20-34(L), the number “2” is displayed to directly suggest that the setting value is “2”. I can't stop. For example, instead of such a direct expression, a picture corresponding to the setting value "2" (a picture reminiscent of the setting value "2") is displayed by being completed when the puzzle is completed. May be

20-32 to 20-34 show the case where the puzzle 2 is completed and it is suggested that the set value is "2", but the set value "1" and the set value "3" are suggested. When performing, the puzzle effect is executed in the same effect mode.

In the feature unit 150IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed with priority over the suggestion effect during the big hit (or the suggestion effect before the game or the suggestion effect during the game). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. Further, in the case where a predetermined effect that can be executed at the same time as the big hit suggestive effect (for example, a specific effect mode of the fanfare effect) is provided, and the predetermined effect makes it difficult to recognize the big hit medium suggestive effect For example, the suggestion during the big hit may be prioritized. Specifically, in the case where the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect makes it difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect, the image is displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect. You may make it display an image preferentially. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit.

Further, in the characteristic portion 150IW, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the decorative pattern is variably displayed by driving the drum-shaped movable body having the decorative pattern on the surface. (In other words, it may be applied to a so-called drum type game machine). Alternatively, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having a decorative pattern on its surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type gaming machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation different from the normal operation at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting change (or the characteristic). Behavior may occur). Therefore, in the first fluctuation after the setting is changed, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the execution ratio may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 150IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are configured to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Also in this case, the visibility may be lowered at a high rate when the player gives an undesired suggestion. For example, when an even-numbered initial result is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestive effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility is reduced. As described above, the ratio of executing the accessory effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate may be increased. Further, not only the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, but also effects including control for outputting a predetermined sound, control for vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and control for causing a decorative light-emitting body such as a decorative LED to emit light in a predetermined mode. By performing the above, the player's attention may be turned to another person, and the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or made less noticeable).

In addition to the setting suggestion effect of the characteristic unit 150IW, a simultaneous effect that is executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer or the real-time clock set when the power is turned on) is executed in a specific mode. The setting may be suggested by.

In addition, a setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting according to the number of times the variable display is continuously executed without the holding memory being 0, or the number of starting winnings exceeding the upper limit holding memory number (for example, a predetermined image). Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be performed.

In addition, a setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting based on the detection of an operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during a predetermined operation valid period (for example, display control of a predetermined image or output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined control). (Emission control of the lamp is performed) may be performed.

The characteristic portion 150IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the characteristic section 150IW, the form in which the security cover 150IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 150IW001a is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 150IW003 side. Good. Specifically, as a modified example 1, as shown in FIGS. 20-35(A) and 20-35(B), a security cover 150IW500B including a short piece 150IW500Ba and a long piece 150IW500Bb is provided, for example, with respect to the substrate case 150IW201. The right end of the long piece 150IW500Bb is provided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction between a covering position for covering the right side of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 and a covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 150IW201 to set through the through hole 150IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 150IW500Bb. It suffices that the key 150IW051 can be operated. That is, in the present modification 1, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the sliding movement in the left-right direction with respect to the substrate case 150IW201 is performed with the security cover 150IW500B (long piece 150IW500Bb) covering the setting key 150IW051. By being regulated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 150IW051 is covered, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is released. The restricted state can be released (can be changed to the permitted state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-35(A) and 20-35(B), when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the projecting dimension of the security cover 150IW500B from the substrate case 150IW201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, by sliding the security cover 150IW500B with respect to the board case 150IW201, the protruding dimension of the security cover 150IW500B from the board case 150IW201 is extended to the length L2. (L2>L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 20-36(A), when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 150IW500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 150IW201. By sliding the board case 150IW201 until the length becomes L2 (making the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowable state), a clerk or the like in the game hall operates the setting key 150IW051 to set the value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 20-36(B), the security cover 150IW500B is mounted on the board case 150IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 150IW201 becomes the length L1. Unless it is slidably moved (without changing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the restricted state), the security cover 150IW500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 150IW001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003. Has become.

For this reason, in this modified example 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state, so that the setting key 150IW051 is covered by the security cover 150IW500B. Forgetting to do so, that is, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 150IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 150IW001a and the gaming machine frame 150IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left and right is restricted. However, the security cover 150IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction within a range in which the state in which the security cover 150IW500B covers the setting key 150IW051 is maintained.

(Modification 2)
Further, as a mode in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 150IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 20-37(A) and 20-37(B) as a modified example 2, the left end portion of the security cover 150IW500C is a gaming machine. Between a covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 150IW201 including the setting key 150IW051 and a covering releasing position rotated from the covering position with the pivot 150IW500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 150IW003 facing in the vertical direction as a center. It may be pivotally supported by. In such a case, when closing the gaming machine frame 150IW003, the front end of the short piece 150IW500Ca is locked to the locking portion 150IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 150IW001a, and the long piece 150IW500Cb pushes the setting key 150IW051 to the rear side. The rotation from the state of being covered to the back side may be restricted.

When the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500C is rotated around the pivot 150IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 150IW051 is covered. It can be operated. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed, the security cover 150IW500C (long piece 150IW500Cb) is restricted from rotating with the setting key 150IW051 being covered, whereby the pachinko gaming machine is controlled. 1 is maintained in the regulated state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500C is rotated around the pivot 150IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 150IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 150IW051 is covered. By doing so, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the restricted state (it can be changed to an allowable state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-38(A), the security cover 150IW500C in the present modification 2 rotates around the pivot 150IW500Cd (puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowed state), thereby By operating the setting key 150IW051 by a store clerk or the like, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 20-38(B), the security cover 150IW500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the security cover 150IW500C sets a key. Unless the 150IW051 is covered (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the regulated state), the security cover 150IW500C abuts on the front end of the outer frame 150IW001a, making it impossible to close the gaming machine frame 150IW003. Has become.

For this reason, in the present modification 2, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state, so that the setting key 150IW051 is covered by the security cover 150IW500C. Forgetting to do so, that is, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 150IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and the security can be improved.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the characteristic section 150IW, an example in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 150IW003 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a glass door frame. The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by opening the 150IW003a. In addition, in the case where the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 150IW003a in this way, a modified example 3 is shown in FIGS. 20-39(A) to 20-39(C). As described above, the through hole 150IW003b may be formed in the lower portion of the gaming machine frame 150IW003, and the setting key 150IW051 can be operated through the through hole 150IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 150IW051 is arranged on the surface of the main board 11 opposite to the mounting surface. ..

When the setting key 150IW051 can be operated via the through hole 150IW003b in this way, a door body 150IW003c capable of opening and closing the through hole 150IW003b is provided, and the setting key 150IW051 cannot be opened when the door body 150IW003c is closed. The operation may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 20-39(B) and 20-39(C), when the door body 150IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 150IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 150IW003a. Since 150IW003c will be sandwiched between the glass door frame 150IW003a and the gaming machine frame 150IW003 so as to be openable and closable, it is possible to strongly prevent the setting key 150IW051 from being illegally operated when the glass door frame 150IW003a is closed. Therefore, security can be improved.

As described above, the feature section 150IW includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. .. Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed and a process of displaying each character image of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion is executed at a predetermined timing. Further, the predetermined timing may be, for example, when the special symbol changes, but it may be more regular (at the time of total change, every predetermined number of changes, etc.) or irregular (when a random number is drawn). It is described that it may be present. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, in a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player, the effect is not always achieved. Can not be raised. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, puzzle effect) (for example, step 150IWS606 in effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including the puzzle effect, and performs step 150IWS608 and effect during variable display effect step (step S172). Part to be executed)
The suggestive effect execution means,
When a display in which a plurality of specific constituent elements (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1)) is gathered is performed, the specific suggestion effect (for example, the maximum number (for example, 5 in the puzzle 150IW107 (Puzzle 1)) is generated as the suggestion effect. It is possible to execute an effect in which the set value “1” is suggested) by collecting all the pieces up to the individual piece) to complete the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1),
When a display in which a plurality of special components (for example, each piece of the puzzle 150IW109 (Puzzle 3)) are gathered is performed, the special suggestion effect (for example, the maximum number (for example, 5 in the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3)) is provided as the suggestion effect. It is possible to execute an effect in which the set value “3” is suggested) by collecting all the pieces up to the above) to complete the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3),
A display in which the specific constituent elements and the special constituent elements are gathered is displayed in a manner different according to the set value that is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-27(B), when the set value is “1”). , The execution ratio of the puzzle effect 1 is slightly high, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) are likely to be gathered a little. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. , The percentage of execution of the puzzle effect 3 is slightly high, and the pieces of the puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3) are likely to be slightly gathered.)
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player has a staging effect. Can be increased.

In this example, the case where an image such as a puzzle piece is displayed as the specific component or the special component is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the sound of various musical instruments may be output as a specific component or a special component, and the set value set by the sound output sounds may be suggested.

In addition, in this example, as a specific example of the “displaying that the specific constituent elements and the special constituent elements are gathered in a different manner depending on the set value”, as shown in FIGS. Although a case has been described in which the puzzle pieces corresponding to the set values are configured to be easily collected, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, depending on the set value, the maximum number of puzzles (in this example, 5) may be different to determine whether or not the puzzle is completed, or the way in which the puzzle pieces are collected up to the middle may be different. Various modes are conceivable, such as changing the ease of acquiring pieces.

Further, in this example, the case where the puzzle effect is executed and the pieces of the puzzle are gathered during the variable display of the decorative pattern is shown, but the invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured such that some puzzle effect is executed during the big hit game and the puzzle pieces are collected.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the specific suggestive effect when the set value being set is the specific set value (for example, the set value “1”), while the special suggestive effect is inexecutable (for example, If Y in step 150IWS813, the effect control CPU 120 can execute puzzle effects 1 by executing steps 150IWS815 to S818, but if N in step 150IWS813 and Y in step 150IWS814, step 150IWS815. ~ Cancel the puzzle effect without shifting to S818)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, the effect effect Can be increased.

In this example, if the setting value is "1", it is ensured that only puzzle 1 is completed, and if the setting value is "2", there is no possibility that puzzles other than puzzle 2 are completed. In the case where the setting value is “3”, the case where the puzzles other than the puzzle 3 are not completed has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the setting value "1" having a particularly low degree of advantage is set, the puzzle 3 corresponding to the setting value "3" having a high degree of advantage is limited so as not to be completed. The puzzles other than the puzzle corresponding to the set value may be completed in some cases.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
Whether or not the suggestion effect executing means performs the display for collecting the specific constituent elements or the special constituent elements based on that the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the lottery processing for presence/absence of the puzzle effect in step 150IWS802 is won). Production (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-33(E) and 20-34(J), one new piece flies and becomes one of puzzle 150IW107 (puzzle 1) to puzzle 150IW109 (puzzle 3)). It is also possible to execute a production that stimulates whether a new puzzle fits. According to such a configuration, one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is described. In the gaming machine that can be set to the set value, the effect of production can be enhanced.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which one new piece flies and the effect is executed to fuel which one of the puzzles 150IW107 (Puzzle 1) to 150IW109 (Puzzle 3) the new puzzle fits into. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even if you perform an effect that stirs whether or not you can acquire a piece, or if you perform an effect that displays multiple pieces and then decides which of those pieces can be acquired. Well, various embodiments are possible.

In addition, in the present example, as the “predetermined condition”, the case where the lottery process is performed for each variable display and the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the fact that the lottery process is won is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a puzzle effect may be executed based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been established based on a big hit, or a puzzle effect may be executed based on the appearance of a predetermined notice effect. Various modes can be considered as the predetermined condition.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can perform a display for collecting the specific component and the special component regardless of which setting value is set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-27). In any of the puzzle effect mode determination tables A to D, the execution ratio of any one of the puzzle effects 1 to 3 is at most 1 to 3% higher than that of the other puzzle effects. Pieces are easy to gather to some extent)
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, the effect effect Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means performs a display (for example, the puzzle display screen 150IW110 shown in FIG. 20-33 (H)) capable of confirming the states of the specific component and the special component being collected (for example, for effect control). (Part of CPU 120 that executes step 150 IWS518)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted. That is, in this example, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by showing the state of the puzzle pieces being collected. In particular, in this example, when the number of fluctuations is 1000 times or less, puzzle pieces corresponding to the highly advantageous setting value “3” are likely to be gathered, so the setting is highly advantageous to the player. It can be expected that the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

In this example, the puzzle display screen 150IW110 is displayed during the customer waiting demonstration display to confirm the acquisition status of the pieces of each puzzle and the completed puzzle status. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the puzzle piece acquisition status and the completed puzzle status may be incorporated into an interface screen and constantly displayed to enable constant confirmation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 6 of the first invention,
Even if the set value that has been set is a set value with a low degree of advantage, the suggestive effect executing means performs a display in which a predetermined number (for example, 3 to 4) of special components corresponding to the high degree of advantage are gathered. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-27(A), in the puzzle effect mode determination table A, the determination rate of the puzzle effect 3 is 2 to 2 as compared with the determination rates of the other puzzle effects 1 and 2. It is 3% higher, and after turning on the game machine, until the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed 1000 times, the puzzle effect 3 is executed and the rate at which the number of pieces of the puzzle 3 increases by 1 is slightly high.)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the first invention,
An information output means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set. Prepare,
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the setting value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (for example, step in effect control CPU 120). 150IWS510-S516, S704-S709, S901-S906),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode or a suggestive effect during game, a big hit mid-time suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed).
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

In the characteristic unit 150IW, for example, it is assumed that the RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 is not backed up with power, and the value of each piece counter or the like is reset when the power of the gaming machine is turned off, and the power is restored. When throwing in, each puzzle shall be started in a reset state. It should be noted that at least a part of the RAM 122 may be configured to be backed up with a power source to back up the value of each piece counter, and in this case, the piece counter of each piece stored in the RAM 122 may be stored in response to the reset operation by the game shop staff. The value may be reset.

Further, in the above case, for example, the game machine may be configured to be started in a state where some pieces of some puzzles are gathered when the game shop is opened. Further, in this case, the set value may be suggested depending on which puzzle piece is started up in a gathered state. In addition, there may be a pattern in which the game machine is activated when one of the puzzles is already completed when the game shop is opened.

The characteristic portion 150IW includes the following second invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. .. Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 describes that the setting change process is executed when the power switch is operated to the ON side while the front frame is opened and the setting key switch is operated to the ON side. .. It is also described that the RAM area other than the setting value storage means is cleared in the setting change processing. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operation means (for example, clear switch) provided so as to be able to execute initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing, RAM clear 2 processing) based on being operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When,
Specific information storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing specific information (for example, RAM clear flag) indicating that the operating means has been operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When executing a plurality of processes including a set value changing process for changing a set value, a process executing means that executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, step 150IWS025 in the game control microcomputer 100). S034 and S048 are executed) and a gaming machine is described. According to this feature, any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for a player is set. Processing can be suitably performed in the game machine configured to be settable. Particularly, in a process that requires a certain amount of processing time, such as changing a set value, specific information (in this example, a RAM clear flag) is stored, and the RAM clear flag is checked to execute the process, which is preferable. It can be performed.

In this example, as a process to be executed "using specific information multiple times", a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is transmitted in steps 150IWS026 and S207 depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set in step 150IWS025. Control, whether to execute the processing to change the setting value of step 150IWS035 to S042 according to whether the RAM clear flag is set in step 150IWS034, or to clear the RAM in step 150IWS048. The case where the restoration process or the RAM clear 1 process of steps 150IWS049 and S051 is executed depending on whether the flag is set is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, whether or not the operation switch is enabled may be controlled immediately before the operation of changing the set value depending on whether or not the specific information (RAM clear flag) is set.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The process execution means changes the set value in the set value change processing based on the operation of the operation means (for example, the part of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS039 to S042).
According to such a configuration, the operating means can also be used, so that an increase in cost can be suppressed. That is, in this example, since the clear switch can be used as the operation means for performing the operation for initializing the RAM 102 and the operation means for changing the set value, the cost increase can be suppressed. it can.

In this example, since the clear switch is also used, it is necessary to check the state of the clear switch multiple times when turning on the power to the gaming machine, so the clear switch should be turned on first when turning on the power to the gaming machine. When it is detected, the RAM clear flag is set, and thereafter, whether or not the RAM clear flag is set is checked to see if the operation of the clear switch for initializing the RAM 102 is performed. As for the operation of the clear switch for the change operation, the state of the clear switch itself is confirmed so that the processing can be appropriately performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The normal initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing) is executed based on the operation means being operated when the power supply to the game machine is started, while the power supply to the game machine is started. Sometimes, an initialization process executing means for executing an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 2 process) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of an abnormality (for example, a part for executing steps 150IWS015, S051 in the game control microcomputer 100) )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the initialization processing at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
Based on that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, it is possible to determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, a portion for executing step 150IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The processing execution means can change the set value based on the judgment that the operation means has been operated by the judgment means in the set value change processing (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 150IWS041). If Y, execute step 150IWS042),
The determining means determines whether or not the operating means has been operated by setting the state of the operating means for the first time when the power supply to the gaming machine is started to be on (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100). Executes step 150IWS037 when N in step 150IWS036)
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
It is provided with a timer interrupt processing execution means (for example, a portion executing steps S21 to S27 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a timer interrupt processing each time a predetermined timer interrupt occurs.
The process execution means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times until the timer interrupt process is executed after the power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, Steps 150 IWS025, S034, S048 are executed)
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
An information output means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set. Prepare,
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the setting value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (for example, step in effect control CPU 120). 150IWS510-S516, S704-S709, S901-S906),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode or a suggestive effect during game, a big hit mid-time suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed).
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, the characteristic portion 150IW includes the following third invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2017-60546. .. Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-60546 describes that if the RAM clear switch is operated and the setting key switch is in the ON state, the initial setting 2 is executed and the lottery probability is changed. Further, it is described that the setting key switch is used to enable the setting switch, and the winning lottery probability of the special figure corresponding to the settings 1 to 3 indicated by the setting switch is set. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-60546, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player is not always appropriate. Processing may not be possible. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Operating means (for example, clear switch),
Process execution means capable of executing a set value changing process for changing the set value based on the operation means being operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, a game control microcomputer (A part of executing steps 150 IWS039 to S042 in 100),
Based on that the state of the operating means is switched from the off state to the on state, the determining means that can determine that the operating means has been operated (for example, the portion that executes step 150IWS041 in the game control microcomputer 100), Prepare,
The processing execution means can change the set value based on the judgment that the operation means has been operated by the judgment means in the setting value change processing (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the step If Y in 150IWS041, execute step 150IWS042),
The determination means determines whether or not the operation means is operated by setting the first state of the operation means when the setting value change processing is started to the ON state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is , If step 150IWS036 is N, execute step 150IWS037)
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is preferably processed. It can be performed. That is, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being changed unintentionally even though the operation unit (the clear switch in this example) is continuously pressed, and the processing is preferably performed. It can be carried out.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the third invention,
A specific information storage unit (for example, a RAM 122) capable of storing specific information (for example, a RAM clear flag) indicating that the operating unit has been operated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When executing a plurality of processes including the setting value changing process, the process executing means executes the process by using the specific information a plurality of times (for example, executes steps 150IWS025, S034, S048 in the game control microcomputer 100). Part)
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The normal initialization processing (for example, RAM clear 1 processing) is executed based on the operation means being operated when the power supply to the game machine is started, while the power supply to the game machine is started. Sometimes, an initialization process executing means for executing an initialization process (for example, RAM clear 2 process) at the time of abnormality based on the detection of an abnormality (for example, a part for executing steps 150IWS015, S051 in the game control microcomputer 100) )When,
A first storage area (for example, a clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the normal initialization process;
A second storage area (for example, a clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102) in which the stored contents are cleared in the initialization processing at the time of abnormality,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information in the second storage area (for example, the RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102).
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the third invention,
A first state storage means (for example, a last time clear switch buffer) for storing the state of the previous operation means,
A second state storage means (for example, a clear switch buffer) for storing the current state of the operation means,
The determining means can determine that the operating means has been operated based on that the stored content of the first state storage means is in the off state and the stored content of the second state storage means is in the on state ( For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 150IWS041),
The first state storage means stores the ON state as the state of the operation means for the first time when the setting value changing process is started (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 150IWS037).
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is suitable. Processing can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
An information output means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set. Prepare,
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the setting value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) (for example, step in effect control CPU 120). 150IWS510-S516, S704-S709, S901-S906),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode or a suggestive effect during game, a big hit mid-time suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is By executing steps 150IWS515, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggestion effect and the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, and the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode are not executed).
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Further, the present characteristic part 150IW includes the following fourth invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) Part that executes 150IWS042),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S114 to S117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit suggestive effect) CPU 150 in step 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, S901 to S906)),
When the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As a matter of course, the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the steps 150IWS513, S707, and S904).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the steps 150IWS047 and S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (e.g., pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestion effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specificity of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, and big hit suggestive effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined. A suggestive effect determination means for determining (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 150IWS511, S513, S515, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906) is provided.
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value that is set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122). Steps 150 IWS511, S705, and S902 are executed based on the set values that are set),
When the set value information is not normally input, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Executes steps 150IWS513, S707, and S904 based on the setting value "1")
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can prevent an increase in data capacity.

In the feature unit 150IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggested effect" includes not only determining whether or not to execute the suggested effect, but also determining the effect mode of the suggested effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (e.g., pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect or It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time slot. Can be motivated to do, and can enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6(A), (B), and FIGS. 20-23(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23(A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying information on the suggested effect that has been executed may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. In addition, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-29(D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fourth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-29(A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (e.g., when the jackpot suggestion production is performed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion production, the jackpot suggestion production is recognized. It is described that it is possible to further provide a difficult character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the fourth invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fourth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the fourth invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 150IW500A/security cover 150IW500B/security cover 150IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulation state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 150IW500A is maintained in a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500A 20-2, 20-3, 20-35 to 20-38), the restricted state is released and the setting key 150IW051 is allowed to be operated.
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.

In addition, the characteristic portion 150IW also includes the following fifth invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) Part that executes 150IWS042),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S114 to S117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit suggestive effect) CPU 150 in step 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, S901 to S906)),
The suggestion effect executing means limits the execution of the suggestion effect when the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal (for example, the effect control CPU 120 makes N in step 150IWS514, S708). When N in S, S905, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect are not executed)
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the steps 150IWS047 and S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (e.g., pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestion effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specificity of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (e.g., pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect or It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time slot. Can be motivated to do, and can enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6(A), (B), and FIGS. 20-23(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23(A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying information on the suggested effect that has been executed may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. In addition, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-29(D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-29(A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (e.g., when the jackpot suggestion production is performed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion production, the jackpot suggestion production is recognized. It is described that it is possible to further provide a difficult character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the fifth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 150IW500A/security cover 150IW500B/security cover 150IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulation state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 150IW500A is maintained in a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500A 20-2, 20-3, 20-35 to 20-38), the restricted state is released and the setting key 150IW051 is allowed to be operated.
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.

The characteristic portion 150IW also includes the sixth invention described below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestive effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) Part that executes 150IWS042),
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S114 to S117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 150IWS047 and S108) ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, for effect control) capable of executing suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit suggestive effect) CPU 150 in step 150 IWS510 to S516, S704 to S709, S901 to S906)),
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode or a suggestive effect during game, a big hit mid-time suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to perform pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect without executing the first suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, By performing steps 150IWS515, S709, S906, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, or the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the steps 150IWS047 and S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (e.g., pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestion effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specificity of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, and big hit suggestive effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined. A suggestive effect determination means for determining (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 150IWS511, S513, S515, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906) is provided.
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the set value that is set among the plurality of types of determination data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122). Steps 150 IWS511, S705, and S902 are executed based on the set values that are set),
When the set value information is not normally input, using dedicated determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, in-game suggestive effect determination table, big hit suggestive effect determination table), The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestive effect determination table, and the big hit suggestive effect determination table in step 150IWS515. , S709, S906 are executed)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (e.g., pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect or It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time slot. Can be motivated to do, and can enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6(A), (B), and FIGS. 20-23(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23(A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517) capable of notifying information on the suggested effect that has been executed may be further provided, and according to such a configuration. In addition, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 20-29(D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-29(A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (e.g., when the jackpot suggestion production is performed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion production, the jackpot suggestion production is recognized. It is described that it is possible to further provide a difficult character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the sixth invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the sixth invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 150IW500A/security cover 150IW500B/security cover 150IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulation state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is closed. In this state, the security cover 150IW500A is maintained in a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 150IW051 is restricted. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 150IW003 is opened, the security cover 150IW500A 20-2, 20-3, 20-35 to 20-38), the restricted state is released and the setting key 150IW051 is allowed to be operated.
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.

It should be noted that the feature section 150IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of effect modes A to C, and when the set value information is not normally input when the effect mode A is controlled, The player is configured to be able to execute the suggestive effect as if it is set to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous to the player (the above-described fourth invention), and if the effect mode B is controlled, the set value is set. When the information is not normally input, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggested effect (the above-mentioned fifth invention configuration), and when the effect mode C is controlled, the set value information is normally input. If not, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect is configured to be executable as the suggestive effect (the above-described sixth invention configuration). I can't stop. For example, the control method of any of the above-mentioned fourth invention to sixth invention may be switched depending on the game state. In this case, for example, if the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not normally input, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect assuming that the preset value is set to have a low advantage for the player. In the configuration (configuration of the above-mentioned fourth invention), if the game state is a time-saving state, if the set value information is not normally input, the execution of the suggestive effect is limited (configuration of the above-mentioned fifth invention). If the game state is a probability change state, and the setting value information is not normally input, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect is executable as the suggestion effect ( The above-mentioned configuration of the sixth invention) may be performed.

In addition, it is not necessary to configure the suggestive effect by all the control methods of the fourth invention to the sixth invention described above, and it is possible to implement the suggestive effect by using only one control method. Good.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 150IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to a missed item, garbled data, or the like, the execution of the suggestive effect is controlled by the control method according to the above-described fourth invention to the sixth invention. Although the effect is limited), the case is not limited to such an aspect. For example, if the set value command is received, but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestive effect may be limited. In this case, for example, each time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received on the side of the effect control means is stored, and when a new setting value command is received thereafter, a new setting value command is newly stored. When the set value indicated by the set value command received in step S1 and the set value stored last time do not match, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and execution of the suggestive effect is performed by the control method of the above fourth invention to sixth invention. You may make it control (limit suggestive production).

Also, the way to make the game different for each of the set values "1" to "3" is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when the set value is an odd number such as "1" or "3", a series of holidays (a big hit continuously occurring during a probability change state) is likely to occur and a holiday will occur. It is configured so that the difference from when it is difficult is large, and in the case of even-numbered setting values such as the setting value “2”, it is configured so that the susceptibility to the consecutive holidays is relatively constant and does not change. The suggestive effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be executable. Then, in this case, when the set value command cannot be normally received, the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the above fourth invention to sixth invention. It may be configured to perform (limit the suggestive effect).

Further, the control method for executing the suggestion effect when the set value command shown in the fourth invention to the sixth invention is not normally received can be applied to the puzzle effect as the suggestion effect.

The characteristic portion 150IW also includes the following seventh invention. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
And a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value that is set,
The suggestion effect executing means, at least, a suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect before game) at a ratio different depending on the set value during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display. It is described that the game machine is characterized by being able to execute (or initial performance, etc.). According to this feature, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the game starts, and the game is played from an early time slot. Can be motivated to do, and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of production identification information (eg, decorative design),
The suggestion effect execution means, during the period from the change of the set value to the execution of the first variable display, suggestive effect in which different identification information for effect is displayed according to the set value being set (for example, It is described that it is possible to execute the display of odd-numbered initial outcomes. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the game machine is restored after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 20). As shown in -20(A) and (B), pre-game suggestive effect determination tables with different determination values are used)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion during game play or a suggestion during big hit) that suggests the set value that has been set, after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may be set to have a higher degree of reliability with respect to the suggested setting value than the suggestion effect, and such a configuration can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

The eighth aspect of the present invention described below is also included in the characteristic portion 150IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be effectively given and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
And a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value that is set,
The suggestion effect executing means sets at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-6(A), (B), and FIGS. 20-23(A), (B)).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period, and to enhance amusement of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that variably displays and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to different ratios when the set value is changed and when it is not changed (for example, FIG. 20-6(A), B))),
It is described that the variable display execution means may be capable of executing variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when it is not changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to a different ratio when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 20-6(A) and (B)),
The variable display execution means can execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect). 20-29 (FIG. 20-29 can be executed based on the fact that the notice effect has been executed, etc.) (for example, when a big hit occurs within a specific period). (See A) and (B))
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

The ninth aspect of the present invention described below is also included in the characteristic portion 150IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that it is not possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is not possible to sufficiently raise the interest. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
And a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value that is set,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-23 (A) and (B)).
A gaming machine is described, which is further provided with an informing unit (for example, a portion in which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517) capable of informing information on the suggested effect that has been executed. According to this feature, In addition, it is possible to check the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestive effect has been executed (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggested effect (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The notification means can notify the information regarding the suggested effect that has been executed while waiting for the customer for which variable display has not been executed (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S150IWS517).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
Information generating means for generating information (e.g., execution history information) relating to the executed suggestive effect;
Image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) in which the information can be read by an imaging device;
It is described that a display unit (for example, the image display device 5) that displays the specific image in a form that can be captured by the image capturing device may be provided. Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

In addition, the characteristic portion 150IW includes the tenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to be recognized by other effects, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
And a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value that is set,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. (See (D))
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the 10th invention,
The limiting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, executing one of them in the fanfare period and ending the other). Change to run in period)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, the execution of the accessory effect is prohibited when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed. See FIG. 20-29(D). )
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means executes the predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestive effect is difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 150IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the normal mode (e.g., a big hit suggestion). Control so that it does not stop at a position that overlaps with the dialogue image produced by the production))
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
The suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect that displays a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include display on one display unit (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the one display means may display the display related to the suggestive performance with priority over the display related to the predetermined performance, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest. You can

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

The 11th invention described below is also included in the characteristic portion 150IW. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the entertainment may be deteriorated by executing the setting suggesting production which is not preferable for the player. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
A setting suggestion executing means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value being set,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 20-29 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (e.g., when the jackpot suggestion production is performed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion production, the jackpot suggestion production is recognized. A game machine characterized by further providing a difficult character effect, a light guide effect, an error display, etc. is described. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 11th invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, character effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 150IW101). According to such a configuration, , The production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the 11th invention,
A light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 150IW103) having a light-transmitting property capable of transmitting light,
A light-emitting body provided so that light can enter from the end surface of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection unit that reflects the light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification means is configured to be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the light emitting plate to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitter to emit light. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of presentation.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the 11th invention,
It is described that the predetermined notifying means may be capable of executing the predetermined notification for displaying an error, and such a configuration can appropriately notify the error.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the 11th invention,
The setting suggestion executing means is a first setting suggestion that suggests that the setting has been made to the first set value (for example, suggestion during big hit in the first effect mode. See FIGS. 20-29(A) and (B)). , A second setting suggestion that suggests that a second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value is set (for example, a big hit medium suggestion effect in the third effect mode. FIG. 20-29 ( (See A) and (B)),
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is executed than when the second setting suggestion is executed (for example, see FIG. 20-29(E)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the 11th invention,
A setting suggestion setting means capable of setting an execution rate of setting suggestion is provided (for example, a setting screen is displayed after power-on, operation means such as a push button 31B, operation means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (management Can be operated only by the person) so that the setting related to the setting suggestion effect can be changed)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the eleventh invention,
A gaming machine that variably displays identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which the identification information is arranged is provided.
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the 11th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

Further, the characteristic portion 150IW includes the twelfth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that the gambling property may become too high in a setting with a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
And a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 20-5(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 20-5(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when it is set to the second set value than when it is set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 20-5(A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting a set value (for example, a suggestive effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in the advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
Equipped with production execution means that can execute production,
The effect execution means is configured to be able to execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, interval effect, ending effect, etc.) during a predetermined control period in the advantageous state regardless of the set value being set. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be set in advance according to the set value that is set, and with such a configuration, the gambling performance becomes too high. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to multiple types of advantageous states,
The game control means can control one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value that has been set,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, see FIG. 20-5(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

The feature section 150IW also includes the thirteenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that the gambling property may become too high in a setting with a high advantage. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the 13th invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting change processing),
And a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 13th invention,
The variable display period varies depending on the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the 13th invention,
It is described that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be different according to the set value that has been set, and such a configuration causes the gambling performance to be too high. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the 13th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when the second setting value is set than when the first setting value is set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the 13th invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period regarding the variable display may be set in advance according to the set value that is set, and with such a configuration, the gambling performance becomes too high. It can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the 13th invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines any of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the 13th invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 150IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means can display a set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the display monitor 150IW029 that can display a ratio, a winning combination, and a base).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can suppress an increase in manufacturing cost.

In addition, in this characteristic part 150IW, the case is shown in which the setting values can be set in three steps of the setting values "1" to "3", but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the setting values of four steps or more are set. It may be configured such that it can be set to a value or can be set to a two-step set value. In this case, for example, it is configured so that the setting value can be set in 6 stages, and the expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit is lowest when the setting value is "1", and the expectation degree for the big hit (when the setting value is "6" ( The reliability may be the highest.

Further, the configuration shown by the characteristic unit 150IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by other characteristic units such as the characteristic unit 31AK to configure a gaming machine. For example, when executing the puzzle effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect indicated by the characteristic part 150IW, the puzzle effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the effect, the title corresponding to the puzzle effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect may be configured to be notified in a manner similar to that of the characteristic part 31AK. ..

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize hole 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary pattern display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23... Count switch 30... Ball hitting handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of setting a setting value relating to a probability of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
An operation unit provided so as to be able to execute the initialization process based on the operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is started,
Specific information storage means capable of storing specific information indicating that the operating means is operated when power supply to the gaming machine is started,
When performing a plurality of processes including a set value changing process for changing the set value , it is determined that the specific information is stored without determining that the operating means is operated for each process. A game machine, comprising: a process execution unit that executes a process based on the above . Information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value has been set,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, the production execution means capable of executing suggestive production,
If the set value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the effect execution unit can execute the suggestion effect with a ratio corresponding to a predetermined set value that is less advantageous to the player among a plurality of set values. Is
The gaming machine according to claim 1.